Home
        Mach3 as Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                    6 7  6 2 7 4  Rewind                                                                                                                    6 7  6 2 7 5  Single BLK                                                                                                             6 7  6 2 7 6  Reverse Run                                                                                                            6 7  6 2 7 7  Line Number                                                                                                           6 7  6 2 7 8  Run from here                                                                                                         6 7  6 2 7 9  Set next line                                                                                                            6 7  6 2 7 10 Block Delete                                                                                                            6 7  6 2 7 11 Optional Stop                                                                                                          6 8  6 2 8  File control family                                                                                                              6 8  6 2 9  Tool details                                                                                                                        6 8  6 2 10 G Code and Toolpath 
2.                                                                                                      9 2  9 2 3  Programming Entry Moves                                                                                                 9 3    10   Mach 2 G  and M code language reference                                  10 4    10 1  Some definitions                                                                                                             10 4  10 1 1 Linear Axes                                                                                                                      10 4  10 1 2 Rotational Axes                                                                                                                10 4  10 1 3 Scaling input                                                                                                                    10 4  10 1 4 Controlled Point                                                                                                               10 4  10 1 5 Co ordinated Linear Motion                                                                                             10 5  10 1 6 Feed Rate                                                                                                                         10 5  10 1 7 Arc Motion                                                                                                                      10 5  10 1 8 Coolant                                           
3.                                                                                                   3 1  3 1 3  The vital re boot                                                                                                                 3 2  3 1 4  Convenient desktop icons                                                                                                   3 2  3 1 5  Testing the installation                                                                                                       3 3  3 1 6  Driver Test after a Mach3 crash                                                                                          3 4  3 1 7  Notes for manual driver installation and un installation                                                       3 4    3 2  Screens                                                                                                                              3 4  3 2 1  Types of object on screens                                                                                                  3 5  3 2 2  Using buttons and shortcuts                                                                                                3 5  3 2 3  Data entry to DRO                                                                                                              3 6    3 3  Jogging                                                                                                                              3 6    3 4  Manual Data Input 
4.                                                                                                 8 5    8 4  Bitmap import  BMP  amp  JPEG                                                                                        8 6    Contents    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  vi    8 4 1  Choosing file to import                                                                                                       8 6  8 4 2  Choose type of rendering                                                                                                    8 6  8 4 3  Raster and spiral rendering                                                                                                 8 7  8 4 4  Dot diffusion rendering                                                                                                      8 7  8 4 5  Writing the G code file                                                                                                       8 7    9   Cutter compensation                                                                        9 1    9 1  Introduction to compensation                                                                                          9 1    9 2  Two Kinds of Contour                                                                                                      9 2  9 2 1  Material Edge Contour                                                                                                       9 2  9 2 2  Tool Path Contour         
5.                                                                                              6 12  6 2 15 2 Safe Z                                                                                                                   6 12  6 2 15 3 CV Mode Angular Limit                                                                                       6 12  6 2 15 4 Offline                                                                                                                  6 12  6 2 16 Encoder control family                                                                                                     6 12  6 2 17 Automatic Z control family                                                                                              6 12  6 2 18 Laser Trigger output family                                                                                              6 13  6 2 19 Custom controls families                                                                                                  6 13    6 3  Using Wizards                                                                                                                6 14    6 4  Loading a G code part program                                                                                    6 15    6 5  Editing a part program                                                                                                  6 16    6 6  Manual preparation and running a part program                   
6.                                                                                             7 5    7 4  How the offset values are stored                                                                                      7 5    7 5  Drawing lots of copies   Fixtures                                                                                      7 6    7 6  Practicalities of  Touching                                                                                              7 7  7 6 1  End mills                                                                                                                           7 7  7 6 2  Edge finding                                                                                                                      7 7    7 7  G52  amp  G92 offsets                                                                                                            7 7  7 7 1  Using G52                                                                                                                          7 8  7 7 2  Using G92                                                                                                                          7 9  7 7 3  Take care with G52 and G92                                                                                              7 9    7 8  Tool diameter                                                                                                                   7 9    8   DXF  HPGL and imag
7.                                                                                   5 7  5 3 6 7  Special function                                                                                                       5 7  5 3 7  Mill Options tab                                                                                                                5 8  5 3 8  Testing                                                                                                                               5 9    5 4  Defining the setup units                                                                                                    5 9    5 5  Tuning motors                                                                                                                5 10  5 5 1  Calculating the steps per unit                                                                                            5 10  5 5 1 1  Calculating mechanical drive                                                                                 5 10  5 5 1 2  Calculating motor steps per revolution                                                                   5 11  5 5 1 3  Calculating Mach3 steps per motor revolution                                                        5 11  5 5 1 4  Mach3 steps per unit                                                                                              5 11  5 5 2  Setting the maximum motor speed                                                           
8.                                                                                  10 5  10 1 9 Dwell                                                                                                                               10 6  10 1 10 Units                                                                                                                                10 6  10 1 11 Current Position                                                                                                               10 6  10 1 12 Selected Plane                                                                                                                  10 6  10 1 13 Tool Table                                                                                                                       10 6  10 1 14 Tool Change                                                                                                                    10 6  10 1 15 Pallet Shuttle                                                                                                                    10 6  10 1 16 Path Control Modes                                                                                                          10 6    10 2  Interpreter Interaction with controls                                                                             10 7  10 2 1 Feed and Speed Override controls                                                                                     10 7  10 2 2 Block D
9.                                                                6 2  6 2 2  Axis control family                                                                                                            6 2  6 2 2 1  Coordinate value DRO                                                                                            6 2  6 2 2 2  Referenced                                                                                                              6 2  6 2 2 3  Machine coordinates                                                                                                6 3  6 2 2 4  Scale                                                                                                                       6 3  6 2 2 5  Softlimits                                                                                                                6 3  6 2 2 6  Verify                                                                                                                     6 3  6 2 2 7  Diameter Radius correction                                                                                     6 3  6 2 3   Move to  controls                                                                                                             6 3  6 2 4  MDI and Teach control family                                                                                            6 3  6 2 5  Jogging control family                                                                    
10.                                                          4 14    4 13  Charge pump   a pulse monitor                                                                                      4 15    4 14  Other functions                                                                                                               4 15    5   Configuring Mach3 for your machine and drives                          5 1    5 1  A configuration strategy                                                                                                   5 1    5 2  Initial configuration                                                                                                         5 1  5 2 1  Defining addresses of port s  to use                                                                                    5 1  5 2 2  Defining engine frequency                                                                                                 5 2  5 2 3  Defining special features                                                                                                    5 2    5 3  Defining input and output signals that you will use                                                         5 2  5 3 1  Axis and Spindle output signals to be used                                                                          5 2  5 3 2  Input signals to be used                                                                                                      5 3  5 3 3  Emulated input si
11.                                                     10 24  10 7 20 Rotate coordinate system     G68 and G69                                                                        10 24  10 7 21 Length Units     G70 and G71                                                                                          10 24  10 7 22 Canned Cycle     High Speed Peck Drill G73                                                                   10 25  10 7 23 Cancel Modal Motion   G80                                                                                           10 25  10 7 24 Canned Cycles   G81 to G89                                                                                          10 25  10 7 24 1 Preliminary and In Between Motion                                                                    10 26  10 7 24 2 G81 Cycle                                                                                                           10 26  10 7 24 3 G82 Cycle                                                                                                           10 27  10 7 24 4 G83 Cycle                                                                                                           10 27  10 7 24 5 G84 Cycle                                                                                                           10 28  10 7 24 6 G85 Cycle                                                                                                           10 28  10 7 24 7 G8
12.                                               5 16  5 5 6 2  Pulse width modulated spindle controller                                                               5 17  5 5 6 3  Step and Direction spindle controller                                                                     5 17    Contents    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  iv    5 5 6 4  Testing the spindle drive                                                                                        5 18    5 6  Other configuration                                                                                                        5 18  5 6 1  Configure homing and softlimits                                                                                       5 18  5 6 1 1  Referencing speeds and direction                                                                           5 18  5 6 1 2  Position of home switches                                                                                     5 18  5 6 1 3  Configure Soft Limits                                                                                            5 18  5 6 1 4  G28 Home location                                                                                                5 19  5 6 2  Configure System Hotkeys                                                                                               5 19  5 6 3  Configure Backlash                                                                                                        
13.                                         10 20  10 7 11 Reference axes G28 1                                                                                                     10 20  10 7 12 Straight Probe     G31                                                                                                      10 20  10 7 12 1 The Straight Probe Command                                                                              10 20  10 7 12 2 Using the Straight Probe Command                                                                     10 21  10 7 12 3 Example Code                                                                                                     10 21  10 7 13 Cutter Radius Compensation   G40  G41  and G42                                                         10 22  10 7 14 Tool Length Offsets   G43  G44 and G49                                                                       10 23  10 7 15 Scale factors G50 and G51                                                                                             10 23  10 7 16 Temporary Coordinate system offset     G52                                                                    10 23  10 7 17 Move in Absolute Coordinates   G53                                                                              10 23  10 7 18 Select Work Offset Coordinate System   G54 to G59  amp  G59 P                                       10 24  10 7 19 Set Path Control Mode   G61  and G64                       
14.                                         4 5  Set fixture coordinate systems   G10             10 18  Set next line button                                           6 7  Setup units  choosing between inch and millimetres         5 9  Shortcuts                            See Keyboard shortcuts  Signal  ground                                                          4 4  Single button                                                     6 7  Slave axis                                    See Axis Slaving  Slaving  configure                                                    5 20  Soft limits                                              See Limits  Special Mach3 sys driver  installation of                                                3 3  need for                                                        3 3  specialdriver bat                                                3 3  Speed and feed override  controlled by M48 M49                            10 34  Spindle  CW and CCW control configuring                5 6  M03   clockwise                                       10 33  M04   counterclockwise                            10 33  M05   stop                                                10 33  PWM control                                                5 7  PWM speed control                                     5 17  Step  amp  Direction speed control                    5 17  Step and Direction control                             5 7  Spindle control  clockwise counterclockwise     
15.                                       10 32  M01   optional program stop                         10 32  M02   program end                                        10 33  M03   spindle clockwise                                10 33  M04   spindle counterclockwise                     10 33  M05   stop spindle                                         10 33  M07   mist coolant on                                    10 33  M08   flood coolant on                                  10 33  M09   all coolant off                                      10 33  M30   action at  configure                                                    5 23  M30   program end                                        10 33  M48   feed and speed override on                  10 34  M49   feed and speed override off                 10 34  M98     filed subroutine call                            10 34  M98   subroutine call                                    10 34  M99   subroutine return                                 10 34     Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  7    Mach Developers NetworkDN  link to                                                               i  Mach3  charge pump monitor              See Charge pump  Components of                                              3 2  computer requirements                                  2 2  demonstration version                                   3 1  how distributed                                             3 1  on laptop                                              
16.                                      5 4  auto and manual override controls               6 11  cabling                                                          4 9  defining override switch input                       5 4  external implementation                                4 8  magnetic  applications for                                         4 9  manual override                                          4 10  microswitches  accuracy of                                               4 9  overtravel                                                  4 9  mounting                                                      4 9  OR for electronic switches                            4 9  purpose                                                         4 8  sharing Mach3 inputs                                  4 10  sharing Mach3 inputs for                               4 9  Limits   soft                                                     5 18  Line  format of code                                           10 10  Line number  format of                                                   10 10  Linear axes  defined                                                        10 4  Linear feed rate move  G01 defined                                              10 16  Linear glass scale  not part of servo loop                                  4 14  quadrature interface                                     4 13  Loading G code program                                 6 15    M    M00   program stop 
17.                                      6 16  6 6 1  Inputting a hand written program                                                                                      6 16  6 6 2  Before you run a part program                                                                                          6 16  6 6 3  Running your program                                                                                                     6 17    6 7  Building G code by importing other files                                                                       6 17    7   Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures                                  7 1    7 1  Machine coordinate system                                                                                              7 1    7 2  Work offsets                                                                                                                     7 2  7 2 1  Setting Work origin to a given point                                                                                   7 3  7 2 2  Home in a practical machine                                                                                               7 4    7 3  What about different lengths of tool                                                                               7 4  7 3 1  Presettable tools                                                                                                                 7 5  7 3 2  Non presettable tools              
18.                                      6 5  by MPG                                                        3 7  control family  described                                                  6 4  joystick                                                         3 7  keyboard                                                       3 6  Continuous                                        3 6  6 4  Step                                                   3 6  6 4  MPG                                                             6 4  rate override                                           3 7  6 4  rate override by joystick throttle                    3 7  slow speed                                                    3 6  Step selected by Ctrl key                               6 4  Axis slaving  purpose and referencing                              4 11    B    Back boring canned cycle    G87                                                          10 29  Backlash  configure                                                    5 19  try to avoid                                                  5 19  Belt or chain pitch                                           5 10  Binary operations  defined                                                      10 11  Bitmap file import  choosing rasterising toolpath                         8 6  dot diffustion rendering                                 8 7  for photo engraving                                       8 6  need to define feedrate before running        
19.                                     6 4  6 2 5 1  Hotkey jogging                                                                                                        6 4  6 2 5 2  Parallel port or Modbus MPG jogging                                                                     6 5  6 2 5 3  Spindle Speed control family                                                                                   6 5  6 2 6  Feed control family                                                                                                            6 5  6 2 6 1  Feed Units per minute                                                                                              6 5  6 2 6 2  Feed Units per rev                                                                                                   6 6  6 2 6 3  Feed display                                                                                                            6 6  6 2 6 4  Feed override                                                                                                          6 6  6 2 7  Program Running control family                                                                                         6 6  6 2 7 1  Cycle Start                                                                                                              6 6  6 2 7 2  FeedHold                                                                                                                6 6  6 2 7 3  Stop     
20.                                 4 13  Coordinate systems  reference definitions                                    10 9  Co ordinated linear motion  defined                                                        10 5  Coordinates of ref switches                              5 18  Copyright statement                                          1 1  Current position  defined                                                        10 6  Custom controls family                                   6 13  Cutter compensation  introduction                                                  9 1  material edge contour                                    9 2  tool path contour                                           9 2  Cutter radius compensation  G40 G41 G42 defined                               10 22  Cutting time  estimate                                                      3 11  CV mode                                                         6 12  Cycle Start button                                              6 7    D    Debounce  configure                                                    5 23  Developers Network  Mach2   link to                                                 i  Diameter compensation LED  described                                                       6 3  Digital Readout                                        See DRO  Digitise  laser trigger grid definition control family   6 13  probe interfaces                                           4 13  Direction  amp  Step in
21.                             5 24  Angular axes  configure                                                    5 23  Angular discrimination  configuration of                                          5 24  Angular limit DRO                                          6 12  Arc   center format                                        10 17  Arc   radius format                                        10 17  Arc at feed rate  G02 G03 defined                                      10 17  Arc motion  defined                                                       10 5  Arcs display or cut incorrectly  wrong IJ Mode setting                                 5 21  Automatic Z control                                        6 12  Axis controls family  described                                                      6 2  Axis coordinate DRO  described                                                      6 2  Axis drive design  design calculation                                         4 6  limitation by Mach3 step rate                        4 7  minimum possible move                               4 6  rapid speed                                                   4 6  Axis drives  role in system                                                2 1    Axis DROs  what they show                                             7 1  Axis jogging                                                     3 6  by Manual Pulse Generator  MPG                 6 5  by Manual Pulse Generatselecting axis to be  moved by MPG    
22.                          5 12  5 5 2 1  Practical trials of motor speed                                                                                5 12  5 5 2 2  Motor maximum speed calculations                                                                       5 13  5 5 2 3  Automatic setting of Steps per Unit                                                                        5 13  5 5 3  Deciding on acceleration                                                                                                  5 14  5 5 3 1  Inertia and forces                                                                                                   5 14  5 5 3 2  Testing different acceleration values                                                                      5 14  5 5 3 3  Why you want to avoid a big servo error                                                                5 14  5 5 3 4  Choosing an acceleration value                                                                              5 14  5 5 4  Saving and testing axis                                                                                                     5 14  5 5 5  Repeat configuration of other axes                                                                                    5 15  5 5 6  Spindle motor setup                                                                                                          5 16  5 5 6 1  Motor speed  spindle speed and pulleys                    
23.                         5 4  OEM triggers   configuring                             5 19  Offline toggle                                                  6 12  Offset  tool                                           See Tool offsets  work                                        See Work offsets  Offset save dialog                                            5 22  Offsets  G52                                                          10 23  G92                                                          10 31  Operators   binary  defined                                                      10 11  Operators   unary  defined                                                      10 12  Optional program stop  M01                                                          10 32  Optional Stop  action of                                                      10 7  Optional Stop switch                                         6 7  Order of G code items on line                        10 13  Output signals  interfacing                                                   4 15  Outputs  defining which to be used                              5 2  Override  for feed and speed   disabling                      10 7  Override feed and speed  controlled by M48 M49                             10 34    P    Parallel port  D25 connector pinout                                    4 3  general background                                       4 3  Parameter  setting value of                                         
24.                        10 23  G49   disable                                             10 23  Tool offsets  reason for                                                      7 4  Tool select  T word                                                      10 35  Tool table  controls family                                              6 9  saving offsets in                                            7 5  Toolpath  display looks inaccurate                                6 8  do not manipulate while running                 3 11  Toolpath display                                              3 11  control on screens                                         3 5  panning                                                       3 11  rotating                                                       3 11  zooming                                                      3 11  Toolpath display configuration                        5 20  Tools  non presettable                                              7 5  presettable                                                     7 5  Tooltip radius  compensation overview                                 7 9  Touching  role of edge finder in                                     7 7  role of slip gage in                                         7 7  Trademarks                                                       1 2  TTL  current sourcing and sinking                          4 3  signal levels                                                  4 3  Turning using Mach
25.                        10 33  10 8 3 Tool change   M6                                                                                                           10 33  10 8 4 Coolant Control   M7  M8  M9                                                                                       10 33  10 8 5 Re run from first line   M47                                                                                           10 34  10 8 6 Override Control   M48 and M49                                                                                   10 34  10 8 7 Call subroutine   M98                                                                                                     10 34  10 8 8 Return from subroutine                                                                                                   10 34    10 9  Macro M codes                                                                                                             10 34  10 9 1 Macro overview                                                                                                             10 34    10 10  Other Input Codes                                                                                                        10 35  10 10 1 Set Feed Rate   F                                                                                                            10 35  10 10 2 Set Spindle Speed   S                                                                                             
26.                      8 3  Polar mode                                                    10 19  Port addresses   finding with Windows Control  Panel                                                            5 2  Preface                                                              1 1  Probe                                        See Straight probe  Probe   design requirements                            4 13  Profile  copying and viewing                                        1  display name of profile in use                        6 1  multiple to allow control of several machine  tools                                                       5 24  persistence when upgrading Mach3               3 4  specified in  p argument                              5 24  Profiles  how stored                                                  5 24  selecting on rselected by the  p argument in  shortcut target                                           3 2  selecting on running Mach3 exe                    3 2  Program  error handling                                           10 35  Program end  M02 M30                                                 10 33  Program end   action at  configure                                                    5 23  Program extrema                                               6 9  Program stop  M00                                                          10 32  Pullback DRO  G73                                                          10 25  Pulley ratios for spin
27.                     10 20  G71   setting                                             10 24  Minimum spindle speed                                  5 16  Mirroring parts                                                10 4  Mist coolant                                                    4 13  Modal groups  defined                                                     10 13  Modal motion  cancelling  G80 explained                                           10 25  Modes  machine   defined                                     10 13  Motor  maximum speed                                          5 12  revs per unit                                                5 10  steps per revolution                                     5 11  tuning                                                         5 10  Motor   spindle  control options                                            4 11  Motor pulleys                                        See Pulleys  Mouse  using Mach3 without                                     3 5  MPG for jogging                                               3 7  MPG inputs  defining                                                        5 5  MSG     string introduces an operator message        10 12    N    NC machine  parts of                                                          2 1  Noise  on signal ground                                           4 4  Number  format of                                                   10 10    O    OEM Trigger inputs                  
28.                    4 12  interlocking requirements                            4 12  Spindle delays                                                   5 7  Spindle drive  configuring                                                   5 6  Spindle speed  control family described                                6 5  maximum  defined for pulleys                     5 16  minimum  defined for pulley                       5 16  S word to set                                             10 35  Spindle speed feedback used for feeds  configure                                                    5 24  Step  amp  Direction  spindle drive                                               4 12  Step  amp  Direction interface  caution about active hi lo                              4 7  waveforms                                                    4 7  Stepper motor drive  properties                                                      4 5  Stepper motor drives  limit of capability                                          4 6  Steps per unit                                                  5 10  Stop button                                                       6 7  Straight probe  example program                                      10 21  G31 defined                          See Straight probe  Subroutine call  M98                                                          10 34  repeating several times                              10 34  Subroutine label  format of                                   
29.                   10 26  repeats by L word                                     10 25  retract defined by R word                          10 26  sticky numbers                                          10 25  Center format arc                                          10 17  Charge pump  on during EStop                                          5 22  Circles display or cut incorrectly  wrong IJ Mode setting                                 5 21  Circular pocket  G12 G13                                                   10 19  Code definition syntax explained                   10 14  Comments  defined                                                     10 12  Concavity checks                                            5 24  Configure  acceleration                                                 5 14  Angular axes                                               5 23  backlash                                                      5 19  belt or chain pitch                                       5 10  configure                                                    5 24  DROs locked to initial units                        5 23  initial state                                                  5 21  M30   action at                                            5 23  Mach3 steps per revolution                          5 11  Mach3 steps per unit                                   5 11  max motor speed                                         5 12  motor revs per unit                                      
30.                 10 10  Subroutine return  M99                                                          10 34  Syntax   Code definition                                10 14  System hotkeys   configuring                          5 19    T    T word   tool select                                        10 35  Tangential control  of knife etc                                                  4 13  Tangential control family                                6 11  Tapping canned cycle    G84                                                          10 28  Teach control family                                         6 3  Teaching  to store sequence of MDI commands             3 7  Testing  axis calibration                                            5 14  configuration settings                                    5 9  for lost steps                                                5 15  Mach3 installation                                         3 3  OCXDiverTest                                              3 3  spindle drive                                               5 18  Timing  defining pin for pulse                                    5 4  Tool change  supplied M6 macros                                  10 33  Tool change action  configure                                                    5 23  Tool length  allowing for by offsets                                   7 4  Tool length offset  G43   enable                                             10 23  G44   enable                      
31.               5 2  Inputting G code program                               6 16  Installation  errors after                                                    3 3  Installation o driver  manual                                                          3 4  Installation of Mach3                                        3 1  Intelligent labels  described                                                      6 1  Interlock  switch for guards                                        5 23  Interlock   machine guard by Input  1              5 4    J    Jerky motion with short lines  Constant velofity mode to avoid                  10 6  Jog Follow Mode                                            5 21  Jog step  setting size                                                    3 6  Jogging                                        See Axis jogging    JPEG file import                  See Bitmap file import  JPG file import                    See Bitmap file import    K    Keyboard  shortcuts                                                       3 5  Keyboard emulator  for additional input signals                            5 4    L    Lathe operation using Mach3Mill                      1 1  LED  control on screens                                         3 5  License statement                                              1 1  Light Emitting Diode                                See LED  Limit switch  defining                                                        5 3  Limit switches              
32.           7 7  G93   feed rate inverse time                           10 31  G94   feed rate units per minute                     10 31  G98   canned cycle return level  to old Z                                                     10 32  G99   canned cycle return level  to R word                                                  10 32  G code display control                                       6 8  G code program  editing                                                        6 16  inputting                                                     6 16  loading                                                        6 15  running                                                       6 17  G code window  control on screens                                         3 5  G codes  summary table                                           10 16  Gouge checks                                                  5 24     Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6    Greyed out text   meaning                                 1 1  Ground  signal                                                            4 4    H    Hardware single step button                            6 11  Home  using location in practical machine                7 4  Home   return to G28 G30                             10 20  Home switch                      See also Limit switches  not near axis limit                                       4 11  purpose                                                         4 8  Home switches  defining abs
33.          2 2  pulse monitor                          See Charge pump  what features it supports                                4 1  what machines it can control                         4 1  MachDN  developers network link                                    i  Machine controller  role in system                                                2 1  Machine coordinates  displaying on axis DROs                               6 3  G53   move in                                           10 23  Machine modes  defined                                                     10 13  Macro M codes                                             10 34  Macros  overview on writing                                  10 34  Manual Data Input                  See MDI  See MDI  Manual Pulse Generator                          See MPG  Maximum spindle speed                                  5 16  M code  macros                                                      10 34  M codes   built in  summary table                                          10 32  MDI  control on screens                                         3 5  screen                                                           3 7  teaching function                                          3 7  use of history                                                3 7  Messages  from part program  defined                        10 12  Mill diameter  compensation overview                                 7 9  Millimetre units  G21   setting                         
34.          4 8  4 6 2  The switches                                                                                                                      4 8  4 6 3  Where to mount the switches                                                                                              4 9  4 6 4  How Mach3 uses shared switches                                                                                     4 10  4 6 5  Referencing in action                                                                                                        4 10    Contents    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  iii    4 6 6  Other Home and Limit options and hints                                                                           4 11    4 7  Spindle control                                                                                                                4 11    4 8  Coolant                                                                                                                           4 13    4 9  Knife direction control                                                                                                   4 13    4 10  Digitise probe                                                                                                                  4 13    4 11  Linear  glass scale  encoders                                                                                          4 13    4 12  Spindle index pulse                                                
35.          all axis words are omitted   If cutter radius compensation is active  the motion will differ from the above  see Cutter  Compensation  If G53 is programmed on the same line  the motion will also differ  see  Absolute Coordinates     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 17    10 7 3 Arc at Feed Rate   G2 and G3  A circular or helical arc is specified using either G2  clockwise arc  or G3   counterclockwise arc   The axis of the circle or helix must be parallel to the X  Y  or Z axis  of the machine coordinate system  The axis  or  equivalently  the plane perpendicular to the  axis  is selected with G17  Z axis  XY plane   G18  Y axis  XZ plane   or G19  X axis   YZ plane   If the arc is circular  it lies in a plane parallel to the selected plane     If a line of code makes an arc and includes rotational axis motion  the rotational axes turn at  a constant rate so that the rotational motion starts and finishes when the XYZ motion starts  and finishes  Lines of this sort are hardly ever programmed     If cutter radius compensation is active  the motion will differ from the above  see Cutter  Compensation     Two formats are allowed for specifying an arc  We will call these the center format and the  radius format  In both formats the G2 or G3 is optional if it is the current motion mode     10 7 3 1 Radius Format Arc  In the radius format  the coordinates of the end point of the arc in the selected plane are  specified along with the radius of the 
36.         10 35  10 10 3 Select Tool     T                                                                                                               10 35    10 11  Error Handling                                                                                                             10 35    10 12  Order of Execution                                                                                                       10 36    11   Appendix 1   Mach3 screenshot pullout                                      11 1    Contents    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  viii    12   Appendix 2   Sample schematic diagrams                                   12 1    12 1  EStop and limits using relays                                                                                         12 1    13   Appendix 3   Record of configuration used                                      1    14   Revision history                                                                                   2    15   Index                                                                                                     3    Preface    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  1 1    1   Preface    Any machine tool is potentially dangerous  Computer controlled machines are  potentially more dangerous than manual ones because  for example  a  computer is quite prepared to rotate an 8  unbalanced cast iron four jaw chuck  at 3000 rpm  to plunge a panel fielding router cutter deep into a piece of oak or  to mill the clamps hol
37.         4 1    4 3  The EStop control                                                                                                             4 2    4 4  The PC parallel port                                                                                                         4 3  4 4 1  The parallel port and its history                                                                                          4 3  4 4 2  Logic signals                                                                                                                      4 3  4 4 3  Electrical noise and expensive smoke                                                                                 4 4    4 5  Axis drive options                                                                                                             4 5  4 5 1  Steppers and Servos                                                                                                            4 5  4 5 2  Doing Axis drive calculations                                                                                             4 6  4 5 3  How the Step and Dir signals work                                                                                     4 7    4 6  Limit and Home switches                                                                                                 4 8  4 6 1  Strategies                                                                                                                  
38.       the Z number is missing and the same canned cycle was not already active         the R number is less than the Z number     When the XZ plane is active  the Y number is sticky  and it is an error if         he Y number is missing and the same canned cycle was not already active         the R number is less than the Y number     When the YZ plane is active  the X number is sticky  and it is an error if         the X number is missing and the same canned cycle was not already active         the R number is less than the X number     10 7 24 1  Preliminary and In Between Motion  At the very beginning of the execution of any of the canned cycles  with the XY plane  selected  if the current Z position is below the R position  the Z axis is traversed to the R  position  This happens only once  regardless of the value of L     In addition  at the beginning of the first cycle and each repeat  the following one or two  moves are made          a straight traverse parallel to the XY plane to the given XY position          a straight traverse of the Z axis only to the R position  if it is not already at the R  position   If the XZ or YZ plane is active  the preliminary and in between motions are analogous     10 7 24 2  G81 Cycle  The G81 cycle is intended for drilling  Program G81 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z    
39.      7 2  Work offsets    Mach3  like all machine controllers  allows you to move the origin of the coordinate system  or  in other words where it measures from  i e  where on the machine is to considered to be  zero for moves of X  Y Z etc      This is called offsetting the coordinate system      Y   Z     Figure 7 2 Machine coordinate system    Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  7 3    Figure 7 3 shows what would happen if we could offset the Current Coordinate system to  the corner of the paper  Remember the G code always moves the Controlled Point to the  numbers given in the Current Coordinate system     As there will usually be some way fixing sheets of paper  one by one  in the position shown   this offset is called a Work offset and the 0  0  0 point is the origin of this coordinate  system     This offsetting is so useful that there are several ways of doing it using Mach3 but they are  all organised using the Offsets screen  see Appendix 1 for a screenshot     7 2 1  Setting Work origin to a given point  The most obvious way consists of two steps     1  Display the Offsets screen  Move the Controlled Point  pen  to where you want the new  origin to be  This can be done by jogging or  if you can calculate how far it is from the  current position you can use G0s with manual data input    2  Click the Touch button next to each of the axes in the Current Work Offset part of the  screen  On the first Touch you will see that the e
40.      J and K are both omitted   Here is an example of a center format command to mill an arc in Incremental IJ mode     G17 G2 x10 y16 i3 j4 z9    That means to make a clockwise  as viewed from the positive z axis  circular or helical arc  whose axis is parallel to the Z axis  ending where X 10  Y 16  and Z 9  with its center  offset in the X direction by 3 units from the current X location and offset in the Y direction  by 4 units from the current Y location  If the current location has X 7  Y 7 at the outset   the center will be at X 10  Y 11  If the starting value of Z is 9  this is a circular arc   otherwise it is a helical arc  The radius of this arc would be 5     The above arc in Absolute IJ mode would be     G17 G2 x10 y16 i10 j11 z9    In the center format  the radius of the arc is not specified  but it may be found easily as the  distance from the center of the circle to either the current point or the end point of the arc     10 7 4 Dwell   G4  For a dwell  program G4 P    This will keep the axes unmoving for the period of time in  seconds or milliseconds specified by the P number  The time unit to be used is set up on the  Config gt Logic dialog  For example  with units set to Seconds  G4 P0 5 will dwell for half a  second  It is an error if         the P number is negative     10 7 5 Set Coordinate System Data Tool and work offset tables   G10  See details of tool and work offsets for further information on coordinate systems    To set the offset values of a tool
41.    10 10  10 5 3 1 Number                                                                                                               10 10  10 5 3 2 Parameter Value                                                                                                  10 11  10 5 3 3 Expressions and Binary Operations                                                                      10 11  10 5 3 4 Unary Operation Value                                                                                        10 12  10 5 4 Parameter Setting                                                                                                           10 12  10 5 5 Comments and Messages                                                                                                10 12  10 5 6 Item Repeats                                                                                                                  10 12  10 5 7 Item order                                                                                                                      10 13  10 5 8 Commands and Machine Modes                                                                                     10 13    10 6  Modal Groups                                                                                                               10 13    10 7  G Codes                                                                                                                        10 14  10 7 1 Rapid Linear Motion  
42.    3   2   1   and then reboots  one of two things has  occurred  Either you didn   t reboot when asked  told you    or the driver is corrupted or  unable to be used in your system  In this case follow the next section and remove the  driver manually  then re install  If the same thing happens  please notify ArtSoft using  the e mail link on www artofcnc ca and you will be given guidance   A few systems have motherboards which have hardware for the APIC timer but whose  BIOS code does not use it  This will confuse Mach3 install  A batch file  SpecialDriver bat is available in the Mach3 installation folder  Find it with  Windows Explorer and double click it to run it  This will make the Mach3 driver use  the older i8529 interrupt controller  You will need to repeat this process whenever you  download an upgraded version of Mach3 as installing the new version will replace the  special driver  The file OriginalDriver bat reverses this change     Overview of Mach3 software    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  3 4    3 1 6  Driver Test after a Mach3 crash  Should you for any reason have a situation when running Mach3 where it crashes   this  might be an intermittent hardware problem or a software bug     then you must run  DriverTest exe as soon as possible after Mach3 has failed  If you delay for two minutes then  the Mach3 driver will cause Windows to fail with the usual  Blue Screen of Death    Running DriverTest resets the driver to a stable condition even if Mach3 disappears  une
43.    8 8  rectangular raster                                           8 6  selecting file to import                                   8 6  writing and loading the G code file                8 7  Block  format of code                                           10 10  Block Delete  action of                                                      10 7  Block delete switch                                           6 7  Blue Screen of Death  action to take after                                         3 4  BMP file import                  See Bitmap file import  Boring manual retract canned cycle     Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4    G88                                                          10 30  Boring and reaming canned cycle  G85                                                          10 28  Boring with dwell and retract canned cycle  G89                                                          10 30  Boring with dwell canned cycle  G86                                                          10 28  Breakout board                                                 4 5  Button  control on screens                                         3 5    C    Cancel modal motion  G80 explained                                           10 25  Canned cycle return level  G98 G99                                                   10 32  Canned cycles                                               10 25  in between motion                                    10 26  preliminary motion                 
44.    A 50  pulse width modulated signal    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 13    You need to take care with the electronics as the inputs of many cheap PWM speed  controllers are not isolated from the mains  Further details can be found in the discussion  and files area of the Mach2DN site and by using  PWM converter  or  PWM Digispeed  as  a search term to Google or your favorite search engine     The PWM signal is output on the spindle Step pin  You will need to take special  precautions to switch off the motor at low speeds using the Motor  Clockwise Counterclockwise outputs     Note  Many users have found that PWM and other variable speed spindle drives are often a  serious source of electrical noise which can cause problems with the machine axis drives   limit switch sensing etc  If you use such a spindle drive we strongly recommend you to use  an optically isolated breakout board and take care to shield cables and run the power cables  a few inches away from the control cables     4 8  Coolant    Output signals can be used to control valves or pumps for flood and mist coolant  These are  activated by screen buttons and or M7  M8  M9     4 9  Knife direction control    Rotary axis A can be configured so it is rotates to ensure that a tool like a knife is tangential  to the direction of movement in G1 moves of X and Y  This allows implementation of a  vinyl or fabric cutter with fully controlled knife     Note  in the curr
45.    Encoder inputs    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 6    5 3 5 2  MPGs  The Counts per unit value is used to define the number of quadrature counts that need to be  generated for Mach3 to see movement of the MPG  For a 100 CPR encoder  a figure of 2 is  suitable  For higher resolutions you should increase this figure to get the mechanical  sensitivity you want  We find 100 works well with 1024 CPR encoders     The Velocity value determines the scaling of pulses sent to the axis being controlled by the  MPG  The lower the value given in Velocity the faster the axis will move  Its value is best  set by experiment to give a comfortable speed when spinning the MPG as fast as is  comfortable     5 3 6 Configuring the spindle  The next tab on Config gt Ports  amp  Pins is Spindle Setup  This is used to define the way in  which your spindle and coolant is to be controlled  You may opt to allow Mach3 to do  nothing with it  to turn the spindle on and off or to have total control of its speed by using a  Pulse Width Modulated  PWM  signal or a step and direction signal  The dialog is shown in  figure 5 8     5 3 6 1  Coolant control  Code M7 can turn Flood coolant on  M9 can turn Mist coolant on and M9 can turn all  coolant off  The Flood Mist control section of the dialog defines which of the output signals  are to be used to implement these functions  The Port Pins for the outputs have already been  defined on the Output Signals tab     If you do not want to us
46.    It  is set by the F word in a part program or by typing into the F DRO  Mach3 will aim to use     Figure 6 6   Spindle speed control family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 6    this speed as the actual rate of the co ordinated  movement of the tool through the material  If  this rate is not possible because of the  maximum permitted speed of any axis then the  actual feed rate will be the highest achievable     6 2 6 2  Feed Units per rev   As modern cutters are often specified by the  permitted cut per  tip  it may be convenient to  specify the feed per revolution  i e  feed per tip  x number of tips on tool   The Prog Feed DRO  gives the feed rate in current units   inches millimetres  per rev of the spindle  It is  set by the F word in a part program or by typing  into the DRO     A revolution of the spindle can either be determined by the S DRO or from the measured  speed by counting index pulses  Config gt Logic has a checkbox to define which Mach3 will  adopt     To employ Feed units rev  Mach3 must know the value of the chosen measure of the speed  of the spindle  i e  it must have been  a  defined in an S word or by data entered to S DRO  in the Spindle speed control family or  b  the Index must be connected up to measure actual  spindle speed      Notice that the numeric values in the control will be very different unless spindle speed  is near to 1 rpm  So using a feed per minute figure with feed per rev mode will  
47.    S word   spindle speed                                   10 35  Safe Z  control                                                        6 12  Safety warning                                           1 1  4 1  professional advice                                 1 1  4 1  Save offsets                                                     5 22  Scale factor   on axis data   G50  G51            10 23  Scale factor DRO  described                                                       6 3  Scaling coordinates                                         10 4  Scaling parts                                                   10 4  Screen  LED   example of                                          3 5  Screen enlarge  automatic                                                    5 22  Screen layouts  sample                                                          3 4  Screen switching buttons                                   6 2  Screen switching controls  described                                                       6 1  Screenshots                                                     11 1  Screw revs per unit                                          5 10  Secondhand equipment  a caution                                                       4 6  Selected plane  defined                                                        10 6  Serial output  configure                                                    5 23     Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  9    Servo motor drives  properties              
48.    Table   X   X    Frame     X and  Reference  ramp   X  X  amp  Ref switch        X ramp     Figure 4 11   Ramps operating one switch     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 11    If you ask Mach3 to reference before you jog off the switch then it will travel in the  opposite direction  because it says that you are already on the home switch  and stop when  you get off the switch  This is fine when you have a separate home switch or are on the  limit at the reference end of the axis  If  however  you are on the other Limit switch  and  Mach3 cannot know this as they are shared  then the axis moves for ever away from the  actual home point until it crashes  So the advice is always jog carefully off the limit  switches  then reference  It is possible to configure mach3 so it will not automatically jog  off the home switch if you are concerned about this problem     4 6 6  Other Home and Limit options and hints  Home switch not near limit switch    It is sometimes not very convenient to have the home switch at a limit of travel  Consider a  large moving column floor mill or a big planer mill  The Z travel on the column might be 8  feet and could be quite slow without affecting the overall cutting performance of the  machine  If  however  the home position is the top of the column  then referencing might  involve nearly 16 feet of slow Z travel  If the reference position was chosen half way up the  column then this time can be hal
49.    The feature is enabled by the Tangential Control   button  In most applications there is a limit to the angle through which the knife can be  turned at a corner while it is in the material  This value is defined in Lift Angle  Any corner  where the change in angle required is greater than Lift Angle will cause the Z axis to rise by  the value in Lift Z  the knife will turn and then Z will drop so it re enters the material in the  new direction     6 2 14 Limits and miscellaneous  control family    6 2 14 1 Input Activation 4  Input activation signal 4 can be configured to  give a hard wired Single Step function  equivalent to the Single button in the Program  Running control family     6 2 14 2 Override limits  Mach3 can use software to override limit  switches connected to its inputs     This can be automatic i e  the jogging performed immediately after a reset will not be  subject to limits until the axis is jogged off the  limit switches  The Toggle button and warning  LED for Auto Limit Override controls this     As an alternative limits may be locked out  using the OverRide Limits toggle  Its use is  indicated by the LED     Notice that these controls do not apply if limit  switches are wired to the drive electronics or to  activate EStop  In this case an external  electrical override switch will be needed to  disable the switch circuit while you jog off  them     6 2 15 System Settings control  family  Note  The controls in this family are not  in one place on the sc
50.   5 19  5 6 4  Configure Slaving                                                                                                            5 20  5 6 5  Configure Toolpath                                                                                                          5 20  5 6 6  Configure Initial State                                                                                                      5 21  5 6 7  Configure other Logic items                                                                                             5 23    5 7  How the Profile information is stored                                                                            5 24    6   Mach3 controls and running a part program                                 6 1    6 1  Introduction                                                                                                                      6 1    6 2  How the controls are explained in this chapter                                                                6 1  6 2 1  Screen switching controls                                                                                                   6 1  6 2 1 1  Reset                                                                                                                       6 1  6 2 1 2  Labels                                                                                                                     6 1  6 2 1 3  Screen selection buttons                           
51.   You can also consider using a Keyboard Emulator for some input signals     Click the Apply button to save the data on this tab     5 3 3 Emulated input signals  If you check the Emulated column for an input then the Port Pin number and active lo state  for that signal will be ignored but the entry in the Hotkey column will be interpreted  When  a key down message is received with code that matches a Hotkey value then that signal is  considered to be active  When a key up message is received then it is inactive     The key up and key down signals usually come from a keyboard emulator  like the  Ultimarc IPAC or Hagstrom  which is triggered by switches connected to its inputs  This  allows more switches to be sensed than spare pins on your parallel ports but there may be  significant time delays before the switch change is seen and indeed a key up or key down  message can get lost by Windows      Figure 5 6     Output signals    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 5    Emulated signals cannot be used for Index or Timing and should not be used for EStop     5 3 4 Output Signals  Use the Output signals tab to define the outputs you require  See figure 5 6     You will probably only want to use one Enable output  as all the axis drives can be  connected to it   Indeed if you are using the charge pump pulse monitor feature then you  may enable your axis drives from its output     The Output  signals are for use to control a stop start spindle  clockwise and optio
52.   each time it is  changed  If you do it this way you can still make use of more than one work offset  see 2  and 3 pin fixtures illustrated below   If you do not have a physical fixture it may be just as  easy to redefine the Z of the work offsets offsets each time you change the tool     7 4  How the offset values are stored    The 254 work offsets are stored in one table in Mach3  The 255 tool offsets and diameters  are stored in another table  You can view these tables using the Work Offsets Table and  Tool Offsets Table buttons on the offsets screen  These tables have space for additional  information which is not at present used by Mach3    Figure 7 6     Endmill in a presettable holder     Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  7 6    Mach3 will generally try to remember the values for all work and tool offsets from one run  of the program to another but will prompt you on closing down the program to check that  you do want to save any altered values  Check boxes on the Config gt State dialog  q v    allow you to change this behaviour so that Mach3 will either automatically save the values  without bothering to ask you or will never save them automatically     However the automatic saving options are configured  you can use the Save button on the  dialogs which display the tables to force a save to occur     7 5  Drawing lots of copies   Fixtures    Now imagine we want to draw on many sheets of  paper  It will be difficult to tape 
53.   known precisely  If the probe tip radius is known only approximately  but the other  conditions hold   the location of the hole center will still be accurate  but the hole diameter  will not     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 22    N010  probe to find center and diameter of circular hole   N020  This program will not run as given here  You have to   N030  insert numbers in place of  lt description of number gt     N040  Delete lines N020  N030  and N040 when you do that    N050 G0 Z  lt Z value of retracted position gt  F  lt feed rate gt   N060  1001  lt nominal X value of hole center gt   N070  1002  lt nominal Y value of hole center gt   N080  1003  lt some Z value inside the hole gt   N090  1004  lt probe tip radius gt   N100  1005   lt nominal hole diameter gt  2 0    1004   N110 G0 X 1001 Y 1002  move above nominal hole center   N120 G0 Z 1003  move into hole   to be cautious  substitute G1 for G0 here   N130 G31 X  1001    1005   probe  X side of hole   N140  1011  2000  save results   N150 G0 X 1001 Y 1002  back to center of hole   N160 G31 X  1001    1005   probe  X side of hole   N170  1021    1011    2000    2 0   find pretty good X value of hole center   N180 G0 X 1021 Y 1002  back to center of hole   N190 G31 Y  1002    1005   probe  Y side of hole   N200  1012  2001  save results   N210 G0 X 1021 Y 1002  back to center of hole   N220 G31 Y  1002    1005   probe  Y side of hole   N230  1022    1012    2001    2 0   find very good Y v
54.   move  command is given on one line  for example  it will be executed again on the next line  if one or more axis words is available on the line  unless an explicit command is given on  that next line using the axis words or cancelling motion      Non modal  codes have effect only on the lines on which they occur  For example  G4   dwell  is non modal     10 6  Modal Groups    Modal commands are arranged in sets called  modal groups   and only one member of a  modal group may be in force at any given time  In general  a modal group contains  commands for which it is logically impossible for two members to be in effect at the same  time   like measure in inches vs  measure in millimetres  A machining system may be in  many modes at the same time  with one mode from each modal group being in effect  The  modal groups are shown in figure 10 3     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 14    For several modal groups  when a machining system is ready to accept commands  one  member of the group must be in effect  There are default settings for these modal groups   When the machining system is turned on or otherwise re initialized  the default values are  automatically in effect     Group 1  the first group on the table  is a group of G codes for motion  One of these is  always in effect  That one is called the current motion mode     It is an error to put a G code from group 1 and a G code from group 0 on the same line if  both of them use axis words  If an ax
55.   program  G10 L1 P  X  Z  A   where the P number must evaluate to an integer in the range 0 to  255   the tool number   Offsets of the tool specified by the P number are reset to the given   The A number will reset the tool tip radius  Only those values for which an axis word is  included on the line will be reset  The Tool diameter cannot be set in this way     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 19    To set the coordinate values for the origin of a fixture coordinate system  program  G10 L2 P  X  Y  Z  A  B  C   where the P number must evaluate to an integer in  the range 1 to 255   the fixture number    Values 1 to 6 corresponding to G54 to G59  and  all axis words are optional  The coordinates of the origin of the coordinate system specified  by the P number are reset to the coordinate values given  in terms of the absolute coordinate  system   Only those coordinates for which an axis word is included on the line will be reset     It is an error if         the P number does not evaluate to an integer in the range 0 to 255     If origin offsets  made by G92 or G92 3  were in effect before G10 is used  they will  continue to be in effect afterwards     The coordinate system whose origin is set by a G10 command may be active or inactive at  the time the G10 is executed     The values set will not be persistent unless the tool or fixture tables are saved using the  buttons on Tables screen     Example  G10 L2 P1 x3 5 y17 2 sets the origin of the first
56.   switched on      Tool Position  when  checked  shows the current  position of the tool on the  display     Figure 5 19   Slaving configuration    Figure 5 20 Configure Toolpath    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 21    Jog Follow Mode  when checked  causes the lines representing the toolpath to move relative  to the window as the tool is jogged  In other words the tool position is fixed in the toolpath  display window     ShowTool as above centerline in Turn relates to Mach3Turn  to handle front and rear  toolposts      Show Lathe Object enables the 3D rendering of the object that will be produced by the  toolpath  Mach3Turn only     Colors for different elements of the display can be configured  The brightness of each of the  primary colors Red Green Blue are set on a scale 0 to 1 for each type of line  Hint  Use a  program like Photoshop to make a color which you like and divide its RGB values by 255   it uses the scale 0 to 255  to get the values for Mach3     The A axis values allow you to specify the position and orientation of the A axis if it is  configured as rotary and the display is enabled by the A Rotations checkbox     Reset Plane on Regen reverts the display of the toolpath display to the current plane  whenever it is regenerated  by double click or button click      Boxed Graphic displays a box at the boundaries of the tool movement     5 6 6  Configure Initial State  Config gt State opens a dialog which allows you to define the modes whic
57.  10 12  using value of                                            10 11  Parameters  predefined                                                   10 7  Part program  editing                                                        6 16  inputting                                                     6 16  loading                                                        6 15  repeating indefinitely   M47                      10 34  repeating indefinitely  M99                       10 34  running                                                       6 17  running controls family  described                                                  6 6  Part Program  running a sample                                           3 7  PC  configuration required                                   2 2  Peck drilling canned cycle  G83                                                          10 27  Peck drilling canned cycle     high speed     Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  8    G73                                                          10 25  Permanent DROs  configure                                                    5 24  Persistent feed override                                   5 24  Persistent jog mode                                         5 22  Persistent offsets                                             5 22  Plane selection  G17 G18 G19 defined                               10 20  Plasma  CV mode optimised for                               5 24  Plasma torch  DXF converted for use with     
58.  8  Y0 3  going clockwise round shape   X0 8  G52 X0 Y0  Get rid of temporary offsets   G0 X0 0 Y0 0 Z2 0  move pen out of the way and lift it     Copying the code is not very elegant but as it is possible to have a G code subroutine  See  M98 and M99  the common code can be written once and called as many times as you need      twice in this example     The subroutine version is shown below  The pen up down commands have been tidied up  and the subroutine actually draws at 0 0 with a G52 being used for setting the corner of both  squares     G20 F10 G90  set up imperial units  a slow feed rate etc    G52 X0 8 Y0 3  start of first square   M98 P1234   call subroutine for square in first position   G52 X3 Y2 3  start of second square   M98 P1234   call subroutine for square in second position   G52 X0 Y0  IMPORTANT     get rid of G52 offsets   M30  rewind at end of program     Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  7 9    O1234   Start of subroutine 1234   G0 X0 Y0  rapid to bottom left of square   G1 Z0 0  pen down   Y1  we can leave out the G1 as we have just done one   X1  Y0  going clockwise round shape   X0  G0 Z2 0  lift pen   M99  return from subroutine     Notice that each G52 applies a new set of offsets which take no account of any previously  issued G52     7 7 2  Using G92  The simplest example with G92 is  at a given point  to set X  amp  Y to zero but you can set  any values  The easiest way to cancel G92 offsets is to enter 
59.  An axis defined as angular is measured in degrees  that is to say  G20 G21 do not alter the interpretation of A  B  C words     Program end or M30 or Rewind  defines action s  to take place at end or a rewind of your  part program  Check the required functions  Caution  Before checking the items to remove  offsets and to perform G92 1 you should be absolutely clear on how these features work or  you may find that the current position has coordinates very different from what you expect  at the end of a program     Debounce interval Index Debounce  Is the number of Mach 2 pulses that a switch must be  stable for its signal to be considered valid  So for a system running at 35 000 Hz   100  would give about a 3 millisecond debounce  100    35000   0 0029 secs   The Index pulse  and the other inputs have independent settings     Program safety  When checked enables Input  1 as a safety cover interlock     Editor  The filename of the executable of the editor to be called by the G code edit button   The Browse button allows a suitable file  e g  C  windows notepad exe  to be found     Serial output  Defines the COM port number to be used for the serial output channel and  the baud rate at which it should output  This port can be written to from VB script in a     Figure 5 22   Logic Configuration dialog    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 24    macro and can be used to control special functions of a machine  e g  LCD display  tool   changers  axis clamps  swarf
60.  Example 1  Suppose the current position is  1  2  3  and the XY plane has been selected   and the following line of NC code is interpreted     G90 G81 G98 X4 Y5 Z1 5 R2 8    G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 27    This calls for absolute distance mode  G90   old  Z  retract mode  G98  and calls for the  G81 drilling cycle to be performed once  The X number and X position are 4  The Y  number and Y position are 5  The Z number and Z position are 1 5  The R number and clear  Z are 2 8  The following moves take place          a traverse parallel to the XY plane to  4 5 3          a traverse parallel to the Z axis to  4 5 2 8          a feed parallel to the Z axis to  4 5 1 5          a traverse parallel to the Z axis to  4 5 3     Example 2  Suppose the current position is  1  2  3  and the XY plane has been selected   and the following line of NC code is interpreted     G91 G81 G98 X4 Y5 Z 0 6 R1 8 L3    This calls for incremental distance mode  G91   old  Z  retract mode and calls for the G81  drilling cycle to be repeated three times  The X number is 4  the Y number is 5  the Z  number is  0 6 and the R number is 1 8  The initial X position is 5   1 4   the initial Y  position is 7   2 5   the clear Z position is 4 8   1 8 3   and the Z position is 4 2   4 8   0 6   Old Z is 3 0    The first move is a traverse along the Z axis to  1 2 4 8   since old Z  lt  clear Z     The first repeat consists of 3 moves          a traverse parallel to the XY plane 
61.  G0                                                                                              10 16  10 7 2 Linear Motion at Feed Rate   G1                                                                                    10 16  10 7 3 Arc at Feed Rate   G2 and G3                                                                                         10 17    Contents    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  vii    10 7 3 1 Radius Format Arc                                                                                              10 17  10 7 3 2 Center Format Arc                                                                                               10 17  10 7 4 Dwell   G4                                                                                                                     10 18  10 7 5 Set Coordinate System Data Tool and work offset tables   G10                                       10 18  10 7 6 Clockwise counterclockwise circular pocket   G12 and G13                                           10 19  10 7 7 Exit and Enter Polar mode   G15 and G16                                                                      10 19  10 7 8 Plane Selection   G17  G18  and G19                                                                              10 20  10 7 9 Length Units   G20 and G21                                                                                           10 20  10 7 10 Return to Home   G28 and G30                                              
62.  G70 G71 which are synonymous     10 7 10 Return to Home   G28 and G30  A home position is defined  by parameters 5161 5166   The parameter values are in terms  of the absolute coordinate system  but are in unspecified length units     To return to home position by way of the programmed position  program  G28 X  Y  Z  A  B  C   or use G30   All axis words are optional  The path is made  by a traverse move from the current position to the programmed position  followed by a  traverse move to the home position  If no axis words are programmed  the intermediate  point is the current point  so only one move is made     10 7 11 Reference axes G28 1  Program G28 1 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  to reference the given axes  The axes will move  at the current feed rate towards the home switch es   as defined by the Configuration  When  the absolute machine coordinate reaches the value given by an axis word then the feed rate  is set to that defined by Configure gt Config Referencing  Provided the current absolute  position is approximately correct  then this will give a soft stop onto the reference  switch es      10 7 12 Straight Probe     G31    10 7 12 1 The Straight Probe Command  Program G31 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  to perform a straight probe operation  The  rotational axis words are allowed  but it is better to omit them  If rotational axis words are  used  the numbers must be the same as the current position numbers so that the rotational  axes do not move  The linear axis words are optional  exc
63.  G92 1  on the MDI line     7 7 3  Take care with G52 and G92  You can specify offsets on as many axes as you like by including a value for their axis  letter  If an axis name is not given then its offset remains unaltered     Mach3 uses the same internal mechanisms for G52 and G92 offsets  it just does different  calculations with your X  Y and Z words  If you use G52 and G92 together you  and even  Mach3  will become so confused that disaster will inevitably occur  If you really want to  prove you have understood how they work  set up some offsets and move the controlled  point to a set of coordinates  say X 2 3 and Y 4 5  Predict the absolute machine  coordinates you should have and check them by making Mach3 display machine  coordinates with the  Mach  button     Do not forget to clear the offsets when you have used them     Warning  Almost everything that can be done with G92 offsets can be done better using  work offsets or perhaps G52 offsets  Because G92 relies on where the controlled point is as  well as the axis words at the time G92 is issued  changes to programs can easily introduce  serious bugs leading to crashes     Many operators find it hard to keep track of three sets of offsets  Work  Tool and G52 G92   and if you get confused you will soon break either your tool or worse your machine     7 8  Tool diameter    Suppose the blue square drawn using our machine is the outline for a hole in the lid of a  child s shape sorter box into which a blue cube will fit  
64.  If your spindle speed will be controlled by Mach3 then you need to Enable the spindle and  allocated a Step pin port for it if it uses pulse width modulated control with relays to control  its direction or to allocate Step and Direction pins ports if it has full control  You should  also define if these signals are active lo  When done  click the Apply button to save the  data on this tab     5 3 2 Input signals to be used  Now select the Input Signals tab  This will look like figure 5 5     We assume that you have chosen one of the home limit strategies from chapter 4 6     If you have used strategy one and the limit switches are connected together and trigger an    EStop or disable the axis drives via the drive electronics then you do not check any of the  Limit inputs     With strategy two you will probably have home switches on the X  Y and Z axes  Enable  the Home switches boxes for these axes and define the Port Pin to which each is connected   If you are combining limits and the home switch then you should enable the Limit     the  Limit    and Home for each axis and allocate the same pin to Home  Limit    and Limit        Figure 5 4     Defining the connections for axes and the controlled spindle     Figure 5 5     Input signals    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 4    Notice the scroll bar to access the rest of the table which is not visible in figure 5 5     The Input  1 is special in that it can be used to inhibit running a part program when sa
65.  J words unless by chance the arc s centre is at the origin     When the XY plane is selected  program G2 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  I  J   or use  G3 instead of G2   The axis words are all optional except that at least one of X and Y must  be used  I and J are the offsets from the current location or coordinates   depending on IJ  mode  X and Y directions  respectively  of the center of the circle  I and J are optional  except that at least one of the two must be used  It is an error if         X and Y are both omitted         I and J are both omitted     When the XZ plane is selected  program G2 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  I  K   or use G3  instead of G2   The axis words are all optional except that at least one of X and Z must be  used  I and K are the offsets from the current location or coordinates   depending on IJ  mode  X and Z directions  respectively  of the center of the circle  I and K are optional  except that at least one of the two must be used  It is an error if         X and Z are both omitted         I and K are both omitted     When the YZ plane is selected  program G2 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  J  K   or use G3  instead of G2   The axis words are all optional except that at least one of Y and Z must be  used  J and K are the offsets from the current location or coordinates   depending on IJ  mode  Y and Z directions  respectively  of the center of the circle  J and K are optional  except that at least one of the two must be used  It is an error if         Y and Z are both omitted    
66.  MDI  and teaching                                                                          3 7  3 4 1  MDI                                                                                                                                   3 7  3 4 2  Teaching                                                                                                                            3 7    3 5  Wizards     CAM without a dedicated CAM software                                                      3 8    3 6  Running a G code program                                                                                           3 10    3 7  Toolpath display                                                                                                             3 11  3 7 1  Viewing the toolpath                                                                                                        3 11  3 7 2  Panning and Zooming the toolpath display                                                                        3 11    3 8  Other screen features                                                                                                     3 11    4   Hardware issues and connecting the machine tool                      4 1    4 1  Safety   emphasised                                                                                                          4 1    4 2  What Mach3 can control                                                                                          
67.  Mach3 inputs     2  Relay contacts are shown in the de energised position  Limit switches and push buttons  are not operated     3  Holding Interface Reset pressed will allow the Mach3 Reset button to be pressed and  the axes to be jogged off the limit switches  The Interface Reset will then latch       limit      limit      limit      limit      limit      limit      limit      limit    Computer or breakout  5 volts    Computer or breakout 0 volts    Control 0 volts    Contactor 0 volts    Control positive  12 volts     Contactor positive  could be same as Control supply     330R    4K7    820R    C3 1  C3 2  C1 1  C2 1    Contacts to control DC supply to  steppers servos  spindle motor  coolant pump etc     EStop1    EStop2    Interface  Reset    330R    To EStop input   active Lo     1N4001    1N4001    1N4001    Mach2 OK  LED    Interface OK  LED    RLA    RLB    RLB 1    RLB 2    RLB 3    RLA 1    from Enable or  charge pump circuit   active Hi     7406    C1  C2  C3     Figure 12 1   Sample EStop and Limit switch connections    Sample schematic diagrams    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  12 2    4  Relay A needs one NO contact  It must have a 5 volt coil that is at least 150 ohms  i e   not require more than 33 milliamps to operate   Omron G6H 2100 5 is suitable with  contacts rated at 1 amp 30 volts DC    5  Relay B needs 1 NC and 2 NO contacts  It can have any convenient coil voltage to suit  an available supply  The common of this should  ideally  not be the PC 0 volt
68.  Teaching   The toolpath display shows  the cuts that will be made   You can revise your  parameters to take smaller  cuts or whatever and re post  the code     If you wish you can save the  settings so the next time you  run the Wizard the initial  data will be what is currently defined      Figure 3 9     Circular Pocket with values set and code posted     Figure 3 8     Circular pocket with defaults    Overview of Mach3 software    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  3 10    When you click Exit you will be returned to the main Mach3 screens and can run the  Wizard generated part program  This process will be often be quicker than reading the  description here     3 6  Running a G code program    Now it is time to input and edit a Part Program  You will normally be able to edit programs  without leaving Mach3 but  as we have not yet configured it to know which editor to use  it  is easiest to set up the program outside Mach3     Use Windows Notepad to enter the following lines into a text file and save it in a  convenient folder  My Documents perhaps  as spiral tap    You must choose All Files in the Save As Type drop down or Notepad will append  TXT to  your filename and Mach3 will not be able to find it      g20 f100  g00 x1 y0 z0  g03 x1 y0 z 0 2 i 1 j0  g03 x1 y0 z 0 4 i 1 j0  g03 x1 y0 z 0 6 i 1 j0  g03 x1 y0 z 0 8 i 1 j0  g03 x1 y0 z 1 0 i 1 j0  g03 x1 y0 z 1 2 i 1 j0  m00  Again all the  0  are zeros in this  Don t forget to press the Enter key after the m0  Use the  File 
69.  XZ plane                                   10 20  G19   select YZ plane                                   10 20    G20   inch units   setting                               10 20  G21   millimetre units   setting                      10 20  G28   return to home                                     10 20  G28 1   reference axes                                   10 20  G30   return to home                                     10 20  G31   straight probe                                       10 20  G40   cutter radius compensation   Off          10 22  G41   cutter radius compensation   Left         10 22  G42   cutter radius compensation   Right       10 22  G43   enable tool length offset                       10 23  G44   enable tool length offset                       10 23  G49   disable tool length offset                      10 23  G50   clear axis scale factors                         10 23  G51   set axis scale factors                            10 23  G52 offsets                                                    10 23  G52 offsets   introduction                                  7 7  G53   move in absolute machine coordinates 10 23  G54   select fixture 1                                     10 24  G55   select fixture 2                                     10 24  G56   select fixture 3                                     10 24  G57   select fixture 4                                     10 24  G58   select fixture 5                                     10 24  G59   select a
70.  a  machine without them but the slightest mistake  setting up can cause a lot of expensive damage     An axis may also have a Home switch  Mach3  can be commanded to move one  or all  axes to  the home position  This will need to be done  whenever the system is switched on so that it  knows where the axes are currently positioned   If you do not provide a Home switch then you  will have to jog the axes by eye to a reference  position  The home switch for an axis can be at  the any coordinate position and you define this  location  Thus the home switches do not have to  be at Machine Zero     As you will see  each axis could need three switches  i e  limit switches at the two ends of  travel and a home switch   So a basic mill would require nine parallel port inputs for them   This is not much good as a parallel port only has 5 inputs  The problem can be solved in  three ways         The limit switches are connected to external logic  perhaps in the drive electronics   and this logic switches off the drives when the limit is reached  The separate  reference switches are connected inputs to Mach3        One pin can share all the inputs for an axis and Mach3 is responsible for  controlling both limits and detecting home        The switches can be interfaced by a keyboard emulator     The first method is best and mandatory for a very large  expensive or fast machine where  you cannot trust software and its configuration to prevent mechanical damage  Switches  connected to the dr
71.  a radius and angle G0 X  Y  can be used  X  is the radius of the line from  the G16 polar origin and Y  is the angle in degrees measured with increasing values  counterclockwise from the 3 o clock direction  i e  the conventional four quadrant  conventions      Coordinates of the current point at the time of executing the G16 are the polar origin     It is an error if         all axis words are omitted   If cutter radius compensation is active  the motion will differ from the above  see Cutter  Compensation  If G53 is programmed on the same line  the motion will also differ  see  Absolute Coordinates     10 7 2 Linear Motion at Feed Rate   G1   a  For linear motion at feed rate  for cutting or not   program G1 X  Y  Z  A  B   C   where all the axis words are optional  except that at least one must be used  The G1 is  optional if the current motion mode is G1  This will produce co ordinated linear motion to  the destination point at the current feed rate  or slower if the machine will not go that fast       b  If G16 has been executed to set a polar origin then linear motion at feed rate to a point  described by a radius and angle G0 X  Y  can be used  X  is the radius of the line from  the G16 polar origin and Y  is the angle in degrees measured with increasing values  counterclockwise from the 3 o clock direction  i e  the conventional four quadrant  conventions      Coordinates of the current point at the time of executing the G16 are the polar origin     It is an error if
72.  as the first   and   in the example   the operation on  the left is performed first  Thus  the example is equivalent to     2 0 3  1 5     5 5 11 0   which simplifies to  1 0 0 5  which is 0 5     The logical operations and modulus are to be performed on any real numbers  not just on  integers  The number zero is equivalent to logical false  and any non zero number is  equivalent to logical true     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 12    10 5 3 4 Unary Operation Value  A unary operation value is either  ATAN  followed by one expression divided by another  expression  for example ATAN 2   1 3   or any other unary operation name followed  by an expression  for example SIN 90    The unary operations are  ABS  absolute value    ACOS  arc cosine   ASIN  arc sine   ATAN  arc tangent   COS  cosine   EXP  e raised to  the given power   FIX  round down   FUP  round up   LN  natural logarithm   ROUND   round to the nearest whole number   SIN  sine   SQRT  square root   and TAN  tangent    Arguments to unary operations which take angle measures  COS  SIN  and TAN  are in  degrees  Values returned by unary operations which return angle measures  ACOS  ASIN   and ATAN  are also in degrees     The FIX operation rounds towards the left  less positive or more negative  on a number  line  so that FIX 2 8  2 and FIX  2 8   3  for example  The FUP operation rounds  towards the right  more positive or less negative  on a number line  FUP 2 8  3 and  FUP  2 8   2  for e
73.  be positive   Notice that initial  before the decimal point and the first non zero digit  and trailing  after  the decimal point and the last non zero digit  zeros are allowed but not required  A number  written with initial or trailing zeros will have the same value when it is read as if the extra  zeros were not there     Numbers used for specific purposes by Mach3 are often restricted to some finite set of  values or some to some range of values  In many uses  decimal numbers must be close to  integers  this includes the values of indexes  for parameters and carousel slot numbers  for  example   M codes  and G codes multiplied by ten  A decimal number which is supposed be  close to an integer is considered close enough if it is within 0 0001 of an integer     10 5 3 2 Parameter Value  A parameter value is the hash character   followed by a real value  The real value must  evaluate to an integer between 1 and 10320  The integer is a parameter number  and the  value of the parameter value is whatever number is stored in the numbered parameter     The   character takes precedence over other operations  so that  for example   1 2 means  the number found by adding 2 to the value of parameter 1  not the value found in parameter  3  Of course    1 2  does mean the value found in parameter 3  The   character may be  repeated  for example   2 means the value of the parameter whose index is the  integer   value of parameter 2     10 5 3 3 Expressions and Binary Operations  An expre
74.  both ends of an axis with Home     Shortest Rot  if checked  makes any rotary axis treat the position given as an angle modulo  360 degrees and move by the shortest route to that position     Debug this run  if checked  gives extra diagnostics to the program designer  On use it on  Art   s special request     Use Watchdogs  if checked  triggers and EStop is Mach3 seems not to be running correctly   You may need to uncheck it if you get spurious EStops on slower computers with  operations like loading Wizards     Enhanced Pulsing  if checked  will ensure the greatest accuracy of timing pulses  and hence  smoothness of stepper drives  at the expense of additional central processor time  You  should generally select this option     Run Macropump  if checked  will on stattup look for a file MacroPump m1s in the macro  folder for the current profile and will run it every 200 milli seconds     Auto Screen Enlarge  if checked  will cause Mach3 to enlarge any screen  and all the  objects on it  if it has fewer pixels than the current PC screen mode so ensuring that it fills  the entire screen area     Charge pump On in EStop  if checked  retains the charge pump output  or outputs  even  when EStop is detected  This is required for the logic of some breakout boards    Z is 2 5D on output  6  if checked  controls Output  6 depending on the current position in  the program coordinate system of the Z axis  If Z  gt  0 0 then Output  6 will be active  You  must have a Z axis configured t
75.  by a milling machine or router      Figure 6 20     Digitise Pulse  family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 14    6 3  Using Wizards    Mach3 Wizards are  an extension to the  Teach facility which  allows you to define  some machining  operations using one  or more special  screens  The Wizard  will then generate G   code to make the  required cuts   Examples of Wizards  include machining a  circular pocket   drilling an array of  holes and engraving  text     The Load Wizards  button displays a table of Wizards installed on your system  You choose the one required  and click Run  The Wizard screen  or sometimes one of several screens  will be displayed   Chapter 3 includes an example for milling a pocket  Figure 6 22 is the Wizard for engraving  text     Wizards have been contributed by several authors and depending on their purpose there are  slight differences in the control buttons  Each Wizard will however have a means of posting  the G code to Mach3  marked Write in figure 6 22  and a means of returning to the main  Mach3 screens  Most Wizards allow you to save your settings so that running the Wizard  again gives the same initial values for the DROs etc      Figure 6 21     Choosing a Wizard    Figure 6 22     The Write Wizard screen    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 15    Figure 6 23 shows a section of the Toolpath screen after the Write button is pressed on  figure 6 22     
76.  by suspending Mach3 and running the filter program  If  you switch to the Mach3Mill screen  for example by accidentally clicking on it   then it will appear to have locked up  You can easily continue by using the     Figure 9 7     Dot diffusion parameters    DXF  HPGL and image file import    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  8 8    Windows task bar to return to the filter and completing the import process  This is  similar to the way the Editor for part programs is run         If your  TAP file already exists and is open in Mach3  then the import filter will  not be able to write to it  Suppose you have tested an import and want to change  the translations by importing again  then you need to make sure that you close the   TAP file in Mach3Mill before repeating the import         You will need to define the feedrate to be used using MDI or by editing the part  program before it is run         Dot Diffusion places big demands on the performance of your Z axis  You must set  the Safe Z as low as possible to minimise the distance travelled and have the Z  axis motor tuning very carefully set  Lost steps part of the way through an  engraving will ruin the job     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  9 1    9   Cutter compensation    Cutter compensation is a feature of Mach3 which you many never have to  use  Most CAD CAM programs can be told the nominal diameter of your    mill and will output part programs which cut the part outline or pocket which    you have 
77.  click Open  Windows will install the driver   The driver can be uninstalled rather more simply         Open the Control panel and double click on the icon or line for System         Select Hardware and click Device Manager        You will be shown a list of devices and their drivers  Mach1 Pulsing Engine has  the driver Mach3 Driver under it  Use the   to expand the tree if necessary  Right   click on Mach3 Driver gives the option to uninstall it  This will remove the file  Mach3 sys from the Windows folder  The copy in the Mach3 will still be there     There is one final point to note  Windows remembers all the information about the way you  have configured Mach3 in a Profile file  This information is not deleted by un installing the  driver and deleting other Mach3 files so it will remain whenever you upgrade the system   However in the very unlikely event that you need a totally clean installation from scratch  then you need to delete the  XML profile file or files     3 2  Screens    You are now ready to try out a  dry run  Mach3  It will be much easier to show you how to  set up your actual machine tool when you have experimented with Mach3 like this  You can   pretend  to machine and learn a lot even if you haven t got a CNC machine tool yet  If you  have got one  then do make sure it is not connected to the PC     Mach3 is designed so that it is very easy to customize its screens to suit the way you work   This means that the screens you see may not look exactly like 
78.  considerable  distance and for some time after the wheel movement has stopped  The steps are  implemented with the federate given by  the MPG Feedrate DRO    These step modes are of particular use in  making very fine controlled movements  when setting up work on a machine  You  are advised to start using Velocity Mode     6 2 5 3  Spindle Speed control family  Depending on the design of your  machine  the machine spindle can be  controlled in three ways   a  Speed is  fixed set by hand  switched on and off by  hand   b  Speed fixed set by hand   switched on and off by M codes via  external activation outputs   c  Speed set  by Mach3 using PWM or step direction  drive     This control family is only important for case  c      The S DRO has its value set when an S word is used in a part program  It is the desired  spindle speed  It can also be set by typing into the DRO     Mach3 will not allow you to try to set it  in either way  to a speed less than that set in Min  Speed or greater than that set in Max Speed on Config gt Port  amp  Pins Spindle Setup tab for  the chosen pulley     If the Index input is configured and a sensor which generates pulses as the spindle revolves  is connected to its pin  then the current speed will be displayed in the RPM DRO  The RPM  DRO cannot be set by you     use the S DRO to command a speed      6 2 6  Feed control family    6 2 6 1  Feed Units per minute  The Prog Feed DRO gives the feed rate in current units  inches millimetres per minute
79.  conveyor etc      Other checkboxes     Persistent DROs  if checked  then the axis DROs will have the same values on startup as  when Mach3 is closed down  Note that the positions of the physical axes are unlikely to be  preserved if the machine tool is powered down  especially with micro stepper drives     Disable Gouge Concavity checks  if unchecked  then  during cutter compensation  G41 and  G42   Mach3 will check if the tool diameter is too large to cut    insider corners    without  gouging the work  Check the box to disable the warning     Plasma Mode  if checked  this controls Mach3 s implementation of constant velocity moves  to suit the characteristics of plasma cutters     No Angular Discrimination  This is also only relevant to constant velocity working  When  unchecked Mach3 treats changes of direction whose angle is greater than the value set in  the CV Angular Limit DRO as exact stop  even if CV mode is set  to avoid excessive  rounding of sharp corners  Full details of Constant Velocity mode are given in chapter 10     FeedOveride Persists  if checked  then the selected feed override will be retained at the end  of a part program run     Allow Wave files  if checked  allows Windows  WAV sound clips to be played by Mach3   This can be used  for example to signal errors or attention required by the machine     Allow Speech  if checked  allows Mach3 to use the Microsoft Speech Agent for system  information messages and  right button  Help text  See the Speech opti
80.  coordinate system  the  one selected by G54  to a point where X is 3 5 and Y is 17 2  in absolute coordinates   The  Z coordinate of the origin  and the coordinates for any rotational axes  are whatever those  coordinates of the origin were before the line was executed     10 7 6 Clockwise counterclockwise circular pocket   G12 and G13  These circular pocket commands are a sort of canned cycle which can be used to produce a  circular hole larger than the tool in use or with a suitable tool  like a woodruff key cutter  to  cut internal grooves for  O  rings etc     Program G12 I  for a clockwise move and G13 I  for a counterclockwise move     The tool is moved in the X direction by the value if the I word and a circle cut in the  direction specified with the original X and Y coordinates as the centre  The tool is returned  to the centre     Its effect is undefined if the current plane is not XY     10 7 7 Exit and Enter Polar mode   G15 and G16  It is possible for G0 and G1 moves in the X Y plane only to specify coordinates as a radius  and angle relative to a temporary center point  Program G16 to enter this mode  The current  coordinates of the controlled point are the temporary center     Program G15 to revert to normal Cartesian coordinates     G0 X10 Y10     normal G0 move to 10 10  G16   start of polar mode   G10X10Y45    this will move to X 17 xxx  Y 17 xxx which is a  spot on a circle   of radius 10 at 45 degrees from  the initial coordinates of 10 10      This can be
81.  coordinates of                          5 23  Hotkeys   configuring                                     5 19  HPGL file import                                              8 4  choosing scale                                               8 4  limitations                                                     8 5  production and filing of G code                     8 5    I    IJ Mode  defines how G02 G03 are interpreted          5 21  IJ mode    Absolute                                      10 17  IJ mode   Increments                                     10 17  Import  DXF file                                                       8 1  Importing foreign data files                             6 17  Inch units  G20   setting                                             10 20  G70   setting                                             10 24  Incremental distance mode  G91                                                          10 30  Incremental IJ mode                                      10 17  Index  defining pin for pulse                                    5 4  interface for spindle                                    4 14  Initial state  configure                                                    5 21  Initialization string                                          5 22  Input pins  shortage of                                                    5 4  Input signals  interfacing                                                  4 15  Inputs  defining which to be used                
82.  e g  rotary tables or dividing heads  the unit is the degree  You need to  calculate based on the worm ratio  This is often 90 1  So with a direct motor drive to the  worm one rev gives 4 degrees so Motor revs per unit would be 0 25  A reduction of 2 1  from motor to worm would give 0 5 revs per unit     5 5 1 2  Calculating motor steps per revolution  The basic resolution of all modern stepper motors is 200 steps per revolution  i e  1 8o per  step   Note  some older steppers are 180 steps per rev  but you are not likely to meet them if  you are buying supported new or nearly new equipment     The basic resolution of a servo motor depends on the encoder on its shaft  The encoder  resolution is usually quoted in CPR  cycles per revolution  Because the output is actually  two quadrature signals the effective resolution will be four time this value  You would  expect a CPR in the range of about 125 to 2000 corresponding to 500 to 8000 steps per  revolution     5 5 1 3  Calculating Mach3 steps per motor revolution  We very strongly recommend that you use micro stepping drive electronics for stepper  motors  If you do not do this and use a full  or half step drive then you will need much  larger motors and will suffer from resonances that limit performance at some speeds     Some micro stepping drives have a fixed number of micro steps  typically 10  while others  can be configured  In this case you will find 10 to be a good compromise value to choose   This means that Mach3 wil
83.  for HPGL is similar to DXF in that a  TAP file is produced which  contains the G code produced from the HPGL    8 3 2  Choosing file to import  The import filter is accessed from File gt Import HPGL BMP JPG and the HPGL button on  the dialog  Figure 8 4 shows the import dialog itself     First choose the Scale corresponding to that at which the HPGL file was produced  This is  usually 40 HPGL units per millimetre  1016 units per inch   You can change this to suit  different HPGL formats or to scale your g code file  For example  choosing 20  rather than  40  would double the size of the objects defined     Now enter the name of the file containing the HPGL data or  Browse  for it  The default  extension for browsing is  PLT so it is convenient to create your files named like this      Figure 8 4     HPGL import filter    DXF  HPGL and image file import    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  8 5    8 3 3  Import parameters  The Pen Up control is the Z values  in the current unit in which Mach3 is working  to be  used when making moves  Pen Up will typically need to position the tool just above the  work     Different depths of cut and feed rates can be programmed for each of the    pens    used to  produce the drawing  You can alsi define the order in which you want cuts to be made  This  allows cutting the inside of an ojbject before you cut it from the stock     If Check only for laser table is checked then the G code will include an M3  Spindle Start  Clockwise  before the move 
84.  for the other axes     Figure 5 13   Establishing a zero position     Figure 5 14   Gage block in position    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 16    5 5 6  Spindle motor setup  If the speed of your spindle motor is fixed or controlled by hand then you can ignore this  section  If the motor is switched on and off  in either direction  by Mach3 then this will have  been setup with the relay outputs     If Mach3 is to control the spindle speed either by a servo drive that accepts Step and  Direction pulses or by a Pulse Width Modulated  PWM  motor controller then this section  tells you how to configure your system     5 5 6 1  Motor speed  spindle speed and pulleys  The Step and Direction and  PWM both allow you to  control the speed of the  motor  When you are  machining what you and  the part program  the S  word  are concerned with  is the speed of the spindle   The motor and spindle  speed are  of course   related by the pulleys or  gears connecting them  We will use the term  pulley  to cover both sorts of drive in this  manual     If you do not have motor speed control the choose Pulley 4 with a high maximum speed  like 10 0000 rpm and   This will prevent Mach3 complaining if you run a program with a S  word asking for say 6000 rpm     Mach3 cannot know without being told by you  the machine operator  what pulley ratio is  selected at any given time so you are responsible for this  Actually the information is given  in two steps  When the system is co
85.  in parenthesese  contains a message if MSG  appears after the  left parenthesis and before any other printing characters  Variants of MSG  which include  white space and lower case characters are allowed  Note that the comma which is required   The rest of the characters before the right parenthesis are considered to be a message to the  operator  Messages are displayed on screen in the  Error  intelligent label     10 5 6 Item Repeats  A line may have any number of G words  but two G words from the same modal group may  not appear on the same line     A line may have zero to four M words  Two M words from the same modal group may not  appear on the same line     For all other legal letters  a line may have only one word beginning with that letter     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 13    If a parameter setting of the same parameter is repeated on a line   3 15  3 6  for  example  only the last setting will take effect  It is silly  but not illegal  to set the same  parameter twice on the same line     If more than one comment appears on a line  only the last one will be used  each of the  other comments will be read and its format will be checked  but it will be ignored thereafter   It is expected that putting more than one comment on a line will be very rare     10 5 7 Item order  The three types of item whose order may vary on a line  as given at the beginning of this  section  are word  parameter setting  and comment  Imagine that these three t
86.  jogged using  a  the jog hotkeys     including an MPG connected via a  keyboard emulator  the hotkeys are defined in Configure Axis hotkeys   b  MPG handwheel   s  connected to an encoder on the parallel port  or a Modbus device  c  joysticks interfaced  as USB Human Interface Devices  or  e  as a legacy feature  a Windows compatible analog  joystick     If the Jog ON OFF button is not displayed or it is toggled to OFF then jogging is not  allowed for safety reasons     6 2 5 1  Hotkey jogging  There are three modes  Continuous  Step and MPG which are selected by the Jog Mode  button and indicated by the LEDs     Continuous mode moves the axis or axes at the defined slow jog rate while the hotkeys are  depressed    The jogging speed used with hotkeys in Continuous mode is set as a percentage of the rapid  traverse rate by the Slow Jog Percentage DRO  This can be set  in the range 0 1  to 100    by typing into the DRO  It can be nudged in 5  increments by the buttons or their hotkeys     This Slow Jog Percentage can be overridden by depressing Shift with the hotkey s   An  LED beside the Cont  LED indicates this full speed jogging is selected    Step mode moves the axis by one increment  as defined by the Jog Increment DRO  for  each keypress  The current feedrate  as defined by the F word  is used for these moves      Figure 6 6   Jogging control  family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 5    The size of increment can be set by t
87.  machine    D  tool radius compensation number    F  feedrate    G  general function  see Table 5     H  tool length offset index    I  X axis offset for arcs  X offset in G87 canned cycle    J  Y axis offset for arcs  Y offset in G87 canned cycle    K  Z axis offset for arcs  Z offset in G87 canned cycle    L  number of repetitions in canned  cycles subroutines  key used with G10    M  miscellaneous function  see Table 7     N  line number    O  Subroutine label number    P  dwell time in canned cycles  dwell time with G4  key used with G10    Q  feed increment in G83 canned cycle  repetitions of subroutine call    R  arc radius  canned cycle retract level    S  spindle speed    T  tool selection    U  Synonymous with A    V  Synonymous with B    W  Synonymous with C    X  X axis of machine    Y  Y axis of machine    Z  Z axis of machine    Figure 10 2   Word initial letters     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 10    or G92 2     You can make straight moves in the absolute machine coordinate system by using G53 with  either G0 or G1     10 5  Format of a Line    A permissible line of input code consists of the following  in order  with the restriction that  there is a maximum  currently 256  to the number of characters allowed on a line         an optional block delete character  which is a slash              an optional line number         any number of words  parameter settings  and comments         an end of line marker  carriage return or line f
88.  of a part to  the XY plane may  for example  be found          if the probe tip radius is known approximately  the parallelism of a face of a part to  the YZ or XZ plane may  for example  be found          if the shank of the probe is known to be well aligned with the Z axis and the probe  tip radius is known approximately  the center of a circular hole  may  for example  be  found          if the shank of the probe is known to be well aligned with the Z axis and the probe  tip radius is known precisely  more uses may be made of the straight probe command   such as finding the diameter of a circular hole     If the straightness of the probe shank cannot be adjusted to high accuracy  it is desirable to  know the effective radii of the probe tip in at least the  X   X   Y  and  Y directions  These  quantities can be stored in parameters either by being included in the parameter file or by  being set in a Mach3 program     Using the probe with rotational axes not set to zero is also feasible  Doing so is more  complex than when rotational axes are at zero  and we do not deal with it here     10 7 12 3  Example Code  As a usable example  the code for finding the center and diameter of a circular hole is  shown in figure 11 5  For this code to yield accurate results  the probe shank must be well   aligned with the Z axis  the cross section of the probe tip at its widest point must be very  circular  and the probe tip radius  i e   the radius of the circular cross section  must be
89.  point  in the correct position to for the start of the line in Line Number  You should not attempt to  Run from here in the middle of a subroutine     6 2 7 9  Set next line  Like Run from here but without the preparatory mode setting or move     6 2 7 10 Block Delete  The Delete button toggles the Block Delete  switch   If enabled then lines of G code which  start with a slash   i e      will not be executed      Figure 6 8   Program running family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 8    6 2 7 11 Optional Stop  The End button toggles the Optional Stop  switch   If enabled then the M01 command will  be treated as M00     6 2 8  File control family  These controls  figure 6 9  are involved with the file of your part program  They should be  self evident in operation     6 2 9  Tool details  In the Tool Details group  figure 6 9  controls display  the current tool  the offsets for its length and diameter  and  on systems with a Digities input  allow it to be  automatically zero to the Z plane     Unless tool change requests are being ignored   Config gt Logic   on encountering an M6 Mach3 will  move to Safe Z and stop  flashing the Tool Change  LED  You continue  after changing the tool  by clicking  Cycle Start     The elapsed time for the current job is displayed in  hours  minutes and seconds      6 2 10 G Code and Toolpath control  family  The currently loaded part program is displayed in the G code window  The current line is  
90.  point of view of the workpiece  If the workpiece  is fastened to a turntable which turns on a rotational axis  a counterclockwise turn from the  point of view of the workpiece is accomplished by turning the turntable in a direction that   for most common machine configurations  looks clockwise from the point of view of  someone standing next to the machine     10 1 3 Scaling input  It is possible to set up scaling factors for each axis  These will be applied to the values of X   Y  Z  A  B  C  I  J and R words whenever these are entered  This allows the size of features  machined to be altered and mirror images to be created   by use of negative scale factors     The scaling is the first thing done with the values and things like feed rate are always based  on the scaled values     The offsets stored in tool and fixture tables are not scaled before use  Scaling may  of  course  have been applied at the time the values were entered  say using G10      10 1 4 Controlled Point  The controlled point is the point whose position and rate of motion are controlled  When the  tool length offset is zero  the default value   this is a point on the spindle axis  often called  the gauge point  that is some fixed distance beyond the end of the spindle  usually near the  end of a tool holder that fits into the spindle  The location of the controlled point can be  moved out along the spindle axis by specifying some positive amount for the tool length  offset  This amount is normally the len
91.  rail to  avoid the long wiring of the limit and EStop switches inducing noise  The Omron MY4  series is suitable having four contacts rated at 5 amps 220 volts AC     6  The LEDs are optional but useful as an indication of what is happening  The current  limiting resistor for the Interface OK LED needs to be 1 8 kilohms if a 24 volt supply is  used     7  If the coil voltages are suitable then the contactors can use the  Control  positive and  common supply     8  The arrangement of contactors  Coils shown as C1  C2  C3  depends on your drive  power supply arrangements and the wiring of the motors in the machine tool  You  should aim to switch the DC supply to the steppers and or servos after the smoothing  capacitor to ensure a prompt stop  You may wish to rewire the spindle and coolant  motors so that the control contactor does not trip the no volt release circuitry  i e  you  may wish to switch the motor leads after the main machine contactors  Do not share  contacts on a given contactor between AC mains and the stepper servo DC supply on  account of the greatly increased risk of a short circuit between these supplies  Seek  advice if you are unsure  especially before working with 230 415 volt 3 phase  circuits     9  The catching diodes across the relay and contactor coils are needed to absorb the back  emf when switching the current off in the coils  Contactors may come with suitable coil  suppression circuits built in      Record of configuration used    Rev 1 84 A2  U
92.  real value     Words may begin with any of the letters shown in figure 11 2  The table includes N and O  for completeness  even though  as defined above  line numbers are not words  Several  letters  I  J  K  L  P  R  may have different meanings in different contexts     A real value is some collection of characters that can be processed to come up with a  number  A real value may be an explicit number  such as 341 or  0 8807   a parameter  value  an expression  or a unary operation value  Definitions of these follow immediately   Processing characters to come up with a number is called  evaluating   An explicit number  evaluates to itself     10 5 3 1 Number  The following rules are used for  explicit  numbers  In these rules a digit is a single  character between 0 and 9         A number consists of  1  an optional plus or minus sign  followed by  2  zero to  many digits  followed  possibly  by  3  one decimal point  followed by  4  zero to  many digits   provided that there is at least one digit somewhere in the number     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 11        There are two kinds of numbers  integers and decimals  An integer does not have a  decimal point in it  a decimal does         Numbers may have any number of digits  subject to the limitation on line length   Only about seventeen significant figures will be retained  however  enough for all  known applications          A non zero number with no sign as the first character is assumed to
93.  shapes         G code display window  with its own scroll bars         Toolpath display  blank square on your screen at the moment     There is one further important type of control that is not on the Program Run screen         MDI  Manual Data Input  line  Buttons and the MDI line are your inputs to Mach3     DROs can be displays by Mach3 or can be used as inputs by you  The background colour  changes when you are inputting     The G code window and Toolpath displays are for information from Mach3 to you  You  can  however  manipulate both of them  e g  scrolling the G code window  zooming   rotating and panning the Toolpath display     3 2 2  Using buttons and shortcuts  On the standard screens most buttons have a keyboard hotkey  This will be shown after the  name on the button itself or in a label near it  Pressing the named key when the screen is  displayed is the same as clicking the button with the mouse  You might like to try using the  mouse and keyboard shortcuts to turn on and off the spindle  to turn on Flood coolant and to  switch to the MDI screen  Notice that letters are sometimes combined with the Control or  Alt keys  Although letters are shown as uppercase  for ease of reading  you do not use the  shift key when using the shortcuts     In a workshop it is convenient to minimise the times when you need to use a mouse   Physical switches on a control panel can be used to control Mach3 by use of a keyboard     Figure 3 3   The screen selection buttons    Overv
94.  slaved to Y   see the chapter 5 on Configuring Mach3 for details  Both axes should have  limit and home switches  In normal use both Y and A will be sent exactly the same step and  direction commands by Mach3  When a Reference operation is performed then the axes will  run together until the final part of referencing which is moving just off the home switches   Here they will move so that each stops the same distance off its own switch  Referencing  will therefore correct any racking  i e  out of squareness  of the gantry which might have  occurred when the machine is switched off or due to lost steps     4 7  Spindle control    There are three different ways in which Mach3 can control your  spindle  or you can ignore  all of these and control it manually     1  Relay contactor control of motor On  Clockwise or Counterclockwise  and motor  Off    2  Motor controlled by Step and Direction pulses  e g  spindle motor is a servo     3  Motor controlled by a pulse width modulated signal    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 12    1  On Off motor control    M3 and a screen button will request that the spindle starts in a clockwise direction  M4 will  request that the spindle starts in an counterclockwise direction  M5 requests that the spindle  stops  M3 and M4 can be configured to activate external output signals which can be  associated with output pins on the parallel ports  You then wire these outputs  probably via  relays  to c
95.  spindle drive     The overall strategy for each axis is   a  to calculate how many step pulses must be sent to  the drive for each unit  inch or mm  of movement of the tool or table   b  to establish the  maximum speed for the motor and  c  to set the required acceleration deceleration rate     We advise you to deal with one axis at a time  You might wish to try running the motor  before it is mechanically connected to the machine tool     So now connect up the power to your axis driver electronics and double check the wiring  between the driver electronics and your breakout board computer  You are about to mix  high power and computing so it is better to be safe than smoky     5 5 1  Calculating the steps per unit  Mach3 can automatically perform a test move on an axis and calculate the steps per unit but  this is probably best left for fine tuning so we present the overall theory here     The number of steps Mach3 must send for one unit of movement depends on the  mechanical drive  e g  pitch of ballscrew  gearing between the motor and the screw   the  properties of the stepper motor or the encoder on the servo motor and the micro stepping or  electronic gearing in the drive electronics     We look at these three points in turn then bring them together     5 5 1 1  Calculating mechanical drive  You are going to calculate the number of revolutions of the motor shaft  motor revs per  unit  to move the axis by one unit  This will probably be greater than one for inches and  l
96.  switch is operated  Note that for  reliable operation you need to  pull up   the input to the parallel port  As  mechanical switches can carry a  significant current a value of 470R is shown which gives a current of about 10 milliamps   As the wiring to the switches might be quite long and liable to pickup of noise make sure  that you have a good connection to the 0 volt side of your input  the frame of your machine  tool will not be satisfactory  and consider using shielded cable with the shield connected to  the main ground terminal of your controller     If you use electronic switches like a slotted detector with a LED and photo transistor  then  you will need some sort of an OR gate  which could be a  wired or  if an Active Lo input is  driven by open collector transistors      Optical switches  if out of the way of coolant  should be OK on a metalworking machine  but are liable to malfunction with wood dust     Don t use magnetic switches  reed switches or Hall effect devices  on a machine that may  cut ferrous metal or the swarf will  fuzz up  the magnet     The repeatability of the operating point  particularly with mechanical switches  is very  dependent on the quality of the switch and the rigidity of its mounting and actuating lever   The setup in Figure 4 6 would be very imprecise  The repeatability is very important for a  switch to be used  for home     Overtravel is the  movement of the  switch that  occurs after it  has operated   With a limit  switch it can b
97.  the speed of motion is the current feed rate  or slower if the machine will not go that  fast   If G0 is active  the speed of motion is the current traverse rate  or slower if the  machine will not go that fast      It is an error if         G53 is used without G0 or G1 being active         G53 is used while cutter radius compensation is on     See relevant chapter for an overview of coordinate systems     10 7 18 Select Work Offset Coordinate System   G54 to G59  amp  G59 P   To select work offset  1  program G54  and similarly for the first six offsets  The system   number G code pairs are   1 G54    2 G55    3 G56    4 G57    5 G58    6 G59     To access any of the 254 work offsets  1   254  program G59 P  where the P word gives  the required offset number  Thus G59 P5 is identical in effect to G58     It is an error if         one of these G codes is used while cutter radius compensation is on     See relevant chapter for an overview of coordinate systems     10 7 19 Set Path Control Mode   G61  and G64  Program G61 to put the machining system into exact stop mode  or G64 for constant  velocity mode  It is OK to program for the mode that is already active  These modes are  described in detail above     10 7 20 Rotate coordinate system     G68 and G69  Program G68 A  B  I  R  to rotate the program coordinate system     A  is the X coordinate and B  the Y coordinate of the center of rotation in the current  coordinate system  i e  including all work and tool offsets and G5
98.  the tool in the X and Z directions  or   ii  by the table and workpiece moving  e g  on a knee type mill the table moves in the  X  Y and Z directions     And optionally         Some switches to say when the tool is in the  Home  position        Some switches to define the limits of permitted relative movement of the tool        A controlled  spindle   The  spindle  might rotate the tool  mill  or the workpiece   turning          Up to three additional axes  These can be defined as Rotary  i e  their movement is  measured in degrees  or Linear  One of the additional linear axes can be slaved to  the X or Y or Z axis  The two will move together at all times in response to a part     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 2    program s moves and to your jogging but they will each be referenced separately    see Configuring slaved axes for more details          A switch or switches which interlock the guards on the machine        Controls for the way coolant is delivered  Flood and or Mist         A probe in the tool holder that allows digitising of an existing part        Encoders  such as linear glass scales  which can display the position of parts of the  machine        Special functions   Most connections between your machine and the PC running Mach3 are made through the  parallel  printer  port s  of the computer  A simple machine will only need one port  a  complex one will need two     Connections for control of special funct
99.  unreliable  clock  the Windows one  to check Mach3 and so get the  false impression that Mach3 s timer is unsteady     Basically  if you see a similar screen to figure 3 2 with only small spikes on the Timer  Variations graph and a steady Pulse Freqency  everything is working well so close the  DriverTest program and skip to the section Screens below     Windows  experts  might be interested to see a few other things  The white rectangular  window is a type of timing analyzer  When it is running it displays a line with small  variations indicated  These variations are the changes in timing from one interrupt cycle to  another  There should be no lines longer than    inch or so on an 17  screen on most  systems  Even if there are variations its possible they are below the threshold necessary to  create timing jitters so when your machine tool is connected you should perform a  movement test to see if jogging and G0 G1 moves are smooth     You may have one of two things happen to you when running the test which may indicate a  problem     1     Driver not found or installed  contact Art      this means that the driver is not loaded  into Windows for some reason  This can occur on XP systems which have a corruption  of their driver database  reloading Windows is the cure in this case  Or  you may be  running Win2000  Win2000 has a bug  feature  which interferes with loading the  driver  It may need to be loaded manually see the next section  2  When the system says  taking over
100.  very useful  for example  for drilling a circle of holes  The code below moves to  a circle of holes every 10 degrees on a circle of radius 50 mm centre X   10  Y   5 5 and  peck drills to Z    0 6    G21     metric  G0 X10Y5 5  G16  G1 X50 Y0    polar move to a radius of 50 angle 0deg  G83 Z 0 6     peck drill  G1 Y10     ten degrees from original center     G83 Z 0 6  G1 Y20     20 degrees    etc     G1 Y30    G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 20    G1 Y40   gt     etc      G15    back to normal cartesian    Notes      1  you must not make X or Y moves other than by using G0 or G1 when G16 is active     2  This G16 is different to a Fanuc implementation in that it uses the current point as  the polar center  The Fanuc version requires a lot of origin shifting to get the desired  result for any circle not centred on 0 0    10 7 8 Plane Selection   G17  G18  and G19  Program G17 to select the XY plane  G18 to select the XZ plane  or G19 to select the YZ   plane  The effects of having a plane selected are discussed in under G2 3 and Canned cycles    10 7 9 Length Units   G20 and G21  Program G20 to use inches for length units  Program G21 to use millimetres     It is usually a good idea to program either G20 or G21 near the beginning of a program  before any motion occurs  and not to use either one anywhere else in the program  It is the  responsibility of the user to be sure all numbers are appropriate for use with the current  length units  See also
101. 1    3   An overview of Mach3 Machine Controller software    You are still reading this so evidently you think Mach3 might be an asset in    your workshop  The best thing to do now is to download a free    demonstration version of the software and try it out on your computer  You  do not need a machine tool to be connected up  indeed for the present it is    better not to have one     If you have bought a complete system from a reseller then some or all of    these installation steps may have be done for you already     3 1  Installation    Mach3 is distributed by ArtSoft Corp  via the Internet  You download the package as one  self installing file  which  in the present release  is about 8 megabytes   This will run for an  unlimited period as a demonstration version with a few limitations on the speed  the size of  job that can be undertaken and the specialist features supported  When you purchase a  licence this will  unlock  the demonstration version you have already installed and  configured  Full details of pricing and options are on the ArtSoft Corporation website  www artofcnc ca    3 1 1  Downloading  Download the package from www artofcnc ca using the right mouse button and Save Target  as    to put the self installing file in any convenient working directory  perhaps  Windows Temp   You should be logged in to Windows as an Administrator     When the file has downloaded it can be immediately run by using the Open button on the  download dialog or this dialog can be c
102. 2 G92 offsets      R  is the rotation angle in degrees  positive is CCW viewed from the positive Z direction      I  is optional and the value is not used  If I  is present it causes the given R value to be  added to any existing rotation set by G68     e g  G68 A12 B25 R45 causes the coordinate system to be rotated by 45 degrees about  the point Z 12  Y 25    Subsequently  G68 A12 B35 I1 R40 leaves the coordinate system rotated by 85  degrees about X   12  Y 25    Program G69 to cancel rotation     Notes          This code only allows rotation when the current plane is X Y         The I word can be used even if the center point is different from that used before  although  in this case  the results need careful planning  It could be useful when  simulating engine turning     10 7 21 Length Units     G70 and G71  Program G70 to use inches for length units  Program G71 to use millimetres     It is usually a good idea to program either G70 or G71 near the beginning of a program  before any motion occurs  and not to use either one anywhere else in the program  It is the    G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 25    responsibility of the user to be sure all numbers are appropriate for use with the current  length units  See also G20 G21 which are synonymous and preferred     10 7 22 Canned Cycle     High Speed Peck Drill G73  The G73 cycle is intended for deep drilling or milling with chip breaking  See also G83   The retracts in this cycle break the chip bu
103. 3 software    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3 7    Rotary encoders can be interfaced  via the parallel port input pins  to Mach3 as Manual  Pulse Generators  MPGs   It is used to perform jogging by turning its knob when in MPG  mode  The buttons marked Alt A  Alt B and Alt C cycle through the available axes for each  of three MPGs and the LEDs define which axis is currently selected for jogging     The another option for jogging is a joystick connected to the PC games port or USB  Mach3  will work with any Windows compatible  analog joystick   so you could even control your  X axis by a Ferrari steering wheel    The appropriate Windows driver will be needed for the  joystick device  The  stick is enabled by the Joystick button and  for safety  must be in the  central position when it is enabled     If you have an actual joystick and it has a throttle control then this can be configured either  to control the jog override speed or the control the feed rate override  see Chapter 5 again    Such a joystick is a cheap way of providing very flexible manual control of your machine  tool  In addition  you can use multiple joysticks  strictly Axes on Human Interface Devices   by installing manufacturer s profiler software or  even better  the KeyGrabber utility  supplied with Mach     Now would be a good time to try all the jogging options on your system  Don t forget that  there are keyboard shortcuts for the buttons  so why not identify them and try them  You  should soon find a wa
104. 3Mill                                  1 1    U    Unary operators  defined                                                      10 12  Un installation of driver  manual                                                          3 4  Units     Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10    button controls                                            6 11  inch  degree ans millimetre                          10 6  Units and safe Z control family described        6 11    W    Wizards                                                            3 8  example of use                                            6 14  Word    format of                                                   10 10  intial letters                                               10 10  Work offsets  controls family                                              6 9  explained                                                      7 3  saved in work offset table                              7 4  setting                                                           7 3     
105. 48 tooth pulley on the screw  So the screw revs per unit   0 1 and  motor revs per unit would be 0 1 x 48    24   0 2    For a rack and pinion or toothed belt or chain drive the calculation is similar     Find the pitch of the belt teeth or chain links  Belts are available in metric and imperial  pitches with 5 or 8 millimetres common metric pitches and 0 375   3 8   common for inch  belts and for chain  For a rack find its tooth pitch  This is best done by measuring the total    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 11    distance spanning 50 or even 100 gaps between teeth  Note that  because standard gears are  made to a diametral pitch  your length will not be a rational number as it includes the  constant     pi   3 14152            For all drives we will call this tooth pitch     If the number of teeth on the pinion sprocket pulley on the primary shaft which drives the  rack belt chain is Ns then   shaft revs per unit   1     tooth pitch x Ns     So  for example with a 3 8  chain and a 13 tooth sprocket which is on the motor shaft then  the motor revs per unit   1     0 375 x 13    0 2051282  In passing we observe that this is  quite  high geared  and the motor might need an additional reduction gearbox to meet the  torque requirements  In this case you multiply the motor revs per unit by the reduction ratio  of the gearbox   motor revs per unit   shaft revs per unit x Ns   Nm    For example a 10 1 box would give 2 051282 revs per inch     For rotary axes 
106. 5 10  motor steps per revolution                           5 11  motor tuning                                               5 10  permanent DROs                                        5 24  program end   action at                               5 23  pulse widths                                                5 13  referencing                                                 5 18  rotary axis units                                          5 11  screw revs per unit                                      5 10  serial output                                                5 23  slaving                                                        5 20  spindle speed feedback used for feeds          5 24  steps per unit                                               5 10  tool change action                                       5 23  Configure   Ports  amp  Pins                                   5 1  Constant velocity mode  G64   setting                                             10 24  purpose of explained                                   10 6  Controlled point  defined                                                7 2  10 4  Coolant    configuring                                                   5 6  control of                                                    10 5  M07   mist on                                           10 33  M08   flood on                                          10 33  M09   all off                                              10 33  Coolant control                
107. 5 A  Work offset 5 B  Work offset 5 C  Work offset 6 X  Work offset 6 Y  Work offset 6 Z  Work offset 6 A  Work offset 6 B  Work offset 6 C  And so on every 20  values until  Work offset 254 X  Work offset 254 Y  Work offset 254 Z  Work offset 254 A  Work offset 254 B  Work offset 254 C  Work offset 255 X  Work offset 255 Y  Work offset 255 Z  Work offset 255 A  Work offset 255 B  Work offset 255 C    Figure 10 1   System defined parameters     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 9    10 4 3 Coordinate Systems  The machining system has an absolute coordinate system and 254 work offset  fixture   systems     You can set the offsets of tools by G10 L1 P  X  Z   The P word defines the tool  offset number to be set     You can set the offsets of the fixture systems using G10 L2 P  X  Y  Z  A  B  C   The P word defines the fixture to be set  The X  Y  Z etc words are the coordinates for the  origin of for the axes in terms of the absolute coordinate system     You can select one of the first seven work offsets by using G54  G55  G56  G57  G58  G59   Any of the 255 work offsets can be selected by G59 P   e g  G59 P23 would select  fixture 23   The absolute coordinate system can be selected by G59 P0     You can offset the current coordinate system using G92 or G92 3  This offset will then  applied on top of work offset coordinate systems  This offset may be cancelled with G92 1    Letter  Meaning    A  A axis of machine    B  B axis of machine    C  C axis of
108. 6 3    direction defined in Config gt Referencing until the input does become active  It  then backs off a short distance so that the input is inactive  If the input is already  active then the axis just moves the same short distance into the inactive position   If Auto Zero DRO when homed is checked in Config gt Referencing then the  absolute machine coordinate of the current position of the axis will be set to the  value defined for the axis in the Home Reference switch locations table in the  Config gt State dialog   The De Ref All button does not move the axes but stops them being in the referenced state     6 2 2 3  Machine coordinates  The MachineCoords button displays absolute machine coordinates  The LED warns that  absolute coordinates are being displayed     6 2 2 4  Scale  Scale factors for any axes can be set by G51 and can be cleared by G50  If a scale factor   other than 1 0  is set then it is applied to coordinates when they appear in G code  e g  as X  words  Y words etc     The Scale LED will flash as a reminder that a scale is set for an axis   The value defined by G51 will appear  and can be set  in the Scale DRO  Negative values  mirror the coordinates about the relevant axis     6 2 2 5  Softlimits  The Softlimits button enables the softlimits values defined in Config gt Homing Limits     6 2 2 6  Verify  The Verify button  which is only applicable if you have home switches  will move to them  to verify if any steps might have been lost during preceding m
109. 6 Cycle                                                                                                           10 28  10 7 24 8 G87 Cycle                                                                                                           10 29  10 7 24 9 G88 Cycle                                                                                                           10 30  10 7 24 10 G89 Cycle                                                                                                           10 30  10 7 25 Set Distance Mode   G90 and G91                                                                                  10 30  10 7 26 Set IJ Mode   G90 1 and G91 1                                                                                       10 30  10 7 27 G92 Offsets   G92  G92 1  G92 2  G92 3                                                                        10 31  10 7 28 Set Feed Rate Mode   G93  G94 and G95                                                                       10 31  10 7 29 Set Canned Cycle Return Level   G98 and G99                                                               10 32    10 8  Built in M Codes                                                                                                          10 32  10 8 1 Program Stopping and Ending   M0  M1  M2  M30                                                        10 32  10 8 2 Spindle Control   M3  M4  M5                                                                
110. A user s guide to installation   configuration and operation      Using Mach3Mill    or    The nurture  care and feeding of the Mach3  controlled CNC Mill     All queries  comments and suggestions welcomed via support artofcnc ca    Mach Developers Network  MachDN  is currently hosted at     http   www machsupport com       2003 4 5 6 Art Fenerty and John Prentice     Front cover  A vertical mill circa 1914  Back cover  if present   The old  gear  way of co ordinating motion on mill table and a  rotary axis     This version is for Mach3Mill Release 1 84    Contents    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  ii    Contents     1   Preface                                                                                               1 1    2   Introducing CNC machining systems                                             2 1    2 1  Parts of a machining system                                                                                             2 1    2 2  How Mach3 fits in                                                                                                            2 2    3   An overview of Mach3 Machine Controller software                     3 1    3 1  Installation                                                                                                                        3 1  3 1 1  Downloading                                                                                                                     3 1  3 1 2  Installing                          
111. Accel slider  A spindle run up time of 30 seconds is quite possible     Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 18    5 5 6 4  Testing the spindle drive  If you have a tachometer or stroboscope then you can measure the spindle speed of your  machine  If not you will have to judge it by eye and using your experience     On Mach3 Settings screen  choose a pulley that will allow 900 rpm  Set the belt or gearbox  on the machine to the corresponding position  On the Program Run screen set the spindle  speed required to 900 rpm and start it rotating  Measure or estimate the speed  If it is wrong  you will have to revisit your calculations and setup     You might also check the speeds on all the pulleys in the same way but with suitable set  speeds     5 6  Other configuration    5 6 1  Configure homing and softlimits    5 6 1 1  Referencing speeds and direction  The Config gt Home Softlimits dialog allows you to define what happens when a reference  operation  G28 1  or a screen button   is performed   Figure 5 16 shows  the dialog  The  Speed   is used to  avoid crashing into  the stop of an axis  at full speed when  looking for the  reference switch   When you are  referencing  Mach3  has no idea of the  position of an axis   The direction it  moves in depends on the Home Neg check boxes  If the relevant box is checked then the  axis will move in the minus direction until the Home input becomes active  If the Home  input is already active then it will move in the plu
112. G41  and G42  To turn cutter radius compensation off  program G40  It is OK to turn compensation off  when it is already off     Cutter radius compensation may be performed only if the XY plane is active     To turn cutter radius compensation on left  i e   the cutter stays to the left of the  programmed path when the tool radius is positive   program G41 D  To turn cutter radius  compensation on right  i e   the cutter stays to the right of the programmed path when the  tool radius is positive   program G42 D  The D word is optional  if there is no D word   the radius of the tool currently in the spindle will be used  If used  the D number should  normally be the slot number of the tool in the spindle  although this is not required  It is OK  for the D number to be zero  a radius value of zero will be used     G41 and G42 can be qualified by a P word  This will override the value of the diameter of  the tool  if any  given in the current tool table entry     It is an error if         the D number is not an integer  is negative or is larger than the number of carousel  slots     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 23        the XY plane is not active         cutter radius compensation is commanded to turn on when it is already on     The behavior of the machining system when cutter radius compensation is ON is described  in the chapter of Cutter Compensation  Notice the importance of programming valid entry  and exit moves     10 7 14 Tool Length Offset
113. Remember G codes move the  Controlled Point  The example part  program drew a 1  square  If the  tool is a thick felt pen then the hole  will be significantly smaller than 1   square  See figure 7 13     The same problem obviously  occurs with an endmill slot drill   You may want to cut a pocket or be  leaving an island  These need  different compensation     This sounds easy to do but in  practice there are many  devils in  the detail  concerned with the  beginning and end of the cutting  It is usual for a Wizard or your CAD CAM software to  deal with these issues  Mach3  however  allows a part program to compensate for the  diameter of the chosen tool with the actual cutting moves being specified as  say  the 1      Figure 7 13   Using a large diameter tool  felt pen     Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  7 10    square  This feature is important if the author of the part program does not know the exact  diameter of the cutter that will be used  e g  it may be smaller than nominal due to repeated  sharpening   The tool table lets you define the diameter of the tool or  is some applications   the difference from the nominal tool diameter of the actual tool being used     perhaps after  multiple sharpening  See Cutter Compensation chapter for full details      DXF  HPGL and image file import    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  8 1    8   DXF  HPGL and image file import    This chapter covers importing files and their conversion to part p
114. Rev 1 84 A2  10 28         Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate downward by delta or to the Z  position  whichever is less deep          Rapid back out to the clear Z          Rapid back down to the current hole bottom  backed off a bit          Repeat steps 1  2  and 3 until the Z position is reached at step 1          Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z   It is an error if         the Q number is negative or zero     10 7 24 5  G84 Cycle    The G84 cycle is intended for right hand tapping with a tap tool  Program    G84 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L          Preliminary motion  as described above          Start speed feed synchronization          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Stop the spindle          Start the spindle counterclockwise          Retract the Z axis at the current feed rate to clear Z          If speed feed synch was not on before the cycle started  stop it          Stop the spindle          Start the spindle clockwise     The spindle must be turning clockwise before this cycle is used  It is an error if         the spindle is not turning clockwise before this cycle is executed     With this cycle  the programmer must be sure to program the speed and feed in the correct  proportion to match the pitch of threads being made  The relationship is that the spindle  speed equals the feed rate times the pitch  in threads per length unit   For example  if the  pitch is 2 threads per millimetre  the active length 
115. Steps per Unit value   Check and correct this     Insert the gage block and move to X   4 0 by G0 X4  This move is in the X minus direction  as was the jog so the effects of backlash in the mechanism will be eliminated  The reading  on the DTI will give your positioning error  It should only be up to a thou or so  Figure 5 14  shows the gage in position     Remove the gage and G0 X0 to check the zero value  Repeat the 4  test to get an set of   perhaps  20 values and see how reproducible the positioning is  If you get big variations  then there is something wrong mechanically  If you get consistent errors then you can fine  tune the Steps per Unit value to achieve maximum accuracy     Next you should check that the axis does not lose steps in repeated moves at speed  Remove  the gage block  Use MDI to G0 X0 and check the zero on the DTI     Use the editor to input the following program     F1000  i e  faster than possible but Mach3 will limit speed   G20 G90  Inch and Absolute   M98 P1234 L50  run subroutine 50 times   M30  stop   O1234  G1 X4  G1 X0  do a feed rate move and move back   M99  return   Click Cycle Start to run it  Check that the motion sounds smooth     When it finishes the DTI should of course read zero  If you have problems then you will  need to fine tune the maximum velocity of acceleration of the axis     5 5 5  Repeat configuration of other axes  With the confidence you will have gained with the first axis you should be able to quickly  repeat the process
116. The DXF lines will be the path of the centreline of the cutter  This is  not straightforward when you are cutting complex shapes         The program generated from a DXF file does not have multiple passes to rough out  a part or clear the centre of a pocket  To achieve these automatically you will need  to use a CAM program    DXF  HPGL and image file import    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  8 4        If your DXF file contains  text  then this can be in two forms depending on the  program which generated it  The letters may be a series of lines  These will be  imported into Mach3  The letters may be DXF Text objects  In this case they will  be ignored  Neither of these situations will give you G code which will engrave  letters in the font used in the original drawing although the lines of an outline font  may be satisfactory with a small v point or bullnose cutter  A plasma or laser  cutter will have a narrow enough cut to follow the outline of the letters and cut  them out although you have to be sure that the centre of letters like  o  or  a  is  cut before the outline     8 3  HPGL import    HPGL files contain lines drawn with one or more pens  Mach3Mill makes the same cuts for  all pens  HPGL files can be created by most CAD software and often have the filename  extension  HPL or  PLT     8 3 1  About HPGL  An HPGL file represents objects to a lower precision than DXF and uses straight line  segments to represent all curves even if they are circles     The import process
117. The Last Wizard buttons runs the wizard you most recently used without the trouble of  selecting it from the list     The Conversational button runs a set of wizards designed by Newfangled Solutions  These  are supplied with Mach3 but require a separate license for them to be used to generate code     6 4  Loading a G code part program    If you have an  existing part program  which was written by  hand or a CAD CAM  package then you  load it into Mach3  using the Load G   Code button  You  choose the file from  a standard Windows  file open dialog   Alternatively you can  choose from a list of  recently used files  which is displayed  by the Recent Files  screen button     When the file is chosen  Mach3 will load and analyse the code  This will generate a toolpath  for it  which will be displayed  and will establish the program extrema     The loaded program code will be displayed in the G code list window  You can scroll  through this moving the highlighted current line using the scroll bar     Figure 6 23     After running the Write wizard     Figure 6 24     Loading G Code    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 16    6 5  Editing a part program    Provided you have defined a program to be used as the G code editor  in Config gt Logic    you can edit the code by clicking the Edit button  Your nominated editor will open in a new  window with the code loaded into it     When you have finished editing you should save the file and exit 
118. Z plane is selected     Rotational axis words are allowed in canned cycles  but it is better to omit them  If  rotational axis words are used  the numbers must be the same as the current position  numbers so that the rotational axes do not move     All canned cycles use X  Y  R  and Z numbers in the NC code  These numbers are used to  determine X  Y  R  and Z positions  The R  usually meaning retract  position is along the  axis perpendicular to the currently selected plane  Z axis for XY plane  X axis for YZ   plane  Y axis for XZ plane   Some canned cycles use additional arguments     For canned cycles  we will call a number  sticky  if  when the same cycle is used on several  lines of code in a row  the number must be used the first time  but is optional on the rest of  the lines  Sticky numbers keep their value on the rest of the lines if they are not explicitly  programmed to be different  The R number is always sticky     In incremental distance mode  when the XY plane is selected  X  Y  and R numbers are  treated as increments to the current position and Z as an increment from the Z axis position  before the move involving Z takes place  when the YZ or XZ plane is selected  treatment of  the axis words is analogous  In absolute distance mode  the X  Y  R  and Z numbers are  absolute positions in the current coordinate system     The L number is optional and represents the number of repeats  L 0 is not allowed  If the  repeat feature is used  it is normally used in incr
119. achining operations     6 2 2 7  Diameter Radius correction  Rotary axes can have the approximate size of the workpiece defined using the Rotational  Diameter control family  This size is used when making blended feedrate calculations for  co ordinated motion including rotational axes  The LED indicates that a non zero value is  defined     6 2 3   Move to  controls  There are many buttons on different screens designed to  make it easy to move the tool  controlled point  to a  particular location  e g  for a tool change   These  buttons include  Goto Zs to move all axes to zero  Goto  Tool Change  Goto Safe Z  Goto Home     In addition Mach3 will remember two different sets of  coordinates and go to them on demand  These are  controlled by Set Reference Point and Goto Ref Point   and by Set Variable Position and Goto Variable  Position    6 2 4  MDI and Teach control family  G code lines   blocks  can be  entered  for  immediate  execution  into the  MDI  Manual Data  Input  line  This is  selected by  clicking in it or the      Figure 6 4     Controlled point  memories  amp  Teach     Figure 6 5     MDI line    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 4    MDI hotkey  Enter in the default configuration   When  the MDI line is active its color changes and a flyout box  showing the recently entered commands is displayed   An example is shown in figure 6 5  The cursor up and  down arrow keys can be used to select from the flyout  so that you 
120. active  an F word must appear on every line which  has a G1  G2  or G3 motion  and an F word on a line that does not have G1  G2  or G3 is  ignored  Being in inverse time feed rate mode does not affect G0  rapid traverse  motions  It  is an error if         inverse time feed rate mode is active and a line with G1  G2  or G3  explicitly or  implicitly  does not have an F word     10 7 29 Set Canned Cycle Return Level   G98 and G99  When the spindle retracts during canned cycles  there is a choice of how far it retracts     1  retract perpendicular to the selected plane to the position indicated by the R word  or    2  retract perpendicular to the selected plane to the position that axis was in just before the  canned cycle started  unless that position is lower than the position indicated by the R  word  in which case use the R word position      To use option  1   program G99 To use option  2   program G98 Remember that the R  word has different meanings in absolute distance mode and incremental distance mode     10 8  Built in M Codes    M codes interpreted directly by Mach3 are shown in figure 10 7     10 8 1 Program Stopping and Ending   M0  M1  M2  M30  To stop a running program temporarily  regardless of the setting of the optional stop  switch   program M0     To stop a running program temporarily  but only if the optional stop switch is on   program  M1     It is OK to program M0 and M1 in MDI mode  but the effect will probably not be  noticeable  because normal behavi
121. ain the offsets you want to  provide  All axis words are optional  except that at least one must be used  If an axis word is  not used for a given axis  the coordinate on that axis of the current point is not changed  It is  an error if         all axis words are omitted     G52 and G92 use common internal mechanisms in Mach3 and may not be used together     When G52 is executed  the origin of the currently active coordinate system moves by the  values given     The effect of G52 is cancelled by programming G52 X0 Y0 etc     Here is an example  Suppose the current point is at X 4 in the currently specified  coordinate system  then G52 X7 sets the X axis offset to 7  and so causes the X coordinate  of the current point to be  3     The axis offsets are always used when motion is specified in absolute distance mode using  any of the fixture coordinate systems  Thus all fixture coordinate systems are affected by  G52     10 7 17 Move in Absolute Coordinates   G53  For linear motion to a point expressed in absolute coordinates  program G1 G53 X  Y   Z  A  B  C   or similarly with G0 instead of G1   where all the axis words are optional     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 24    except that at least one must be used  The G0 or G1 is optional if it is in the current motion  mode  G53 is not modal and must be programmed on each line on which it is intended to be  active  This will produce co ordinated linear motion to the programmed point  If G1 is  active 
122. al  amplifier comparator  TTL output  encoders will connect directly to  the input pins of the parallel port but  as noise will give false counts  they are better  interfaced via what is known as a Schmitt trigger chip  The scales require a DC supply   often 5 volts  for the lights and any driver chips in them     Notice      a  that you can not easily use a linear scale as the feedback encoder for a servo drive  as the slightest backlash or springiness in the mechanical drive will make the servo  unstable      b  it is not easy to connect the rotary encoders on the servo motor to the encoder  DROs  This would be attractive for manual operation of the axes with position  readout  The problem is that the 0 volt  common  inside the servo drive used for the  motor encoders is almost certainly not the same 0 volt as your PC or breakout board   Connecting them together will cause problems   don t be tempted to do it      c  the main benefit of using linear encoders on linear axes is that their measurements  do not depend on the accuracy or backlash of the drive screw  belt  chain etc     4 12  Spindle index pulse    Mach3 has an input for one or more pulses generated each revolution of the spindle  It uses  this to display the actual speed of the spindle  to co ordinate the movement of the tool and  work when cutting threads and for orientating the tool for the back boring canned cycle  It  can be used to control feed on a per rev rather than per minute basis      Figure 4 15   Gl
123. alue of hole center   N240  1014   1012    2001    2    1004    find hole diameter in Y direction   N250 G0 X 1021 Y 1022  back to center of hole   N260 G31 X  1021    1005   probe  X side of hole   N270  1031  2000  save results   N280 G0 X 1021 Y 1022  back to center of hole   N290 G31 X  1021    1005   probe  X side of hole   N300  1041    1031    2000    2 0   find very good X value of hole center   N310  1024   1031    2000    2    1004    find hole diameter in X direction   N320  1034    1014    1024    2 0   find average hole diameter   N330  1035   1024    1014   find difference in hole diameters   N340 G0 X 1041 Y 1022  back to center of hole   N350 M2  that s all  folks     Figure 10 5   Code to Probe Hole    In figure 10 5 an entry of the form  lt description of number gt  is meant to be replaced by an  actual number that matches the description of number  After this section of code has  executed  the X value of the center will be in parameter 1041  the Y value of the center in  parameter 1022  and the diameter in parameter 1034  In addition  the diameter parallel to  the X axis will be in parameter 1024  the diameter parallel to the Y axis in parameter 1014   and the difference  an indicator of circularity  in parameter 1035  The probe tip will be in  the hole at the XY center of the hole     The example does not include a tool change to put a probe in the spindle  Add the tool  change code at the beginning  if needed     10 7 13 Cutter Radius Compensation   G40  
124. ample     Suppose the diameter of the cutter currently in the spindle is 0 97  and the diameter  assumed in generating the tool path was 1 0  Then the value in the tool table for the    G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  9 3    diameter for this tool should be  0 03  Here is an NC program which cuts material away  from the outside of the triangle in the figure     N0010 G1 X1 Y4 5  make alignment move   N0020 G41 G1 Y3 5  turn compensation on and make first entry  move   N0030 G3 X2 Y2 5 I1  make second entry move   N0040 G2 X2 5 Y2 J 0 5  cut along arc at top of tool path   N0050 G1 Y 1  cut along right side of tool path   N0060 G2 X2 Y 1 5 I 0 5  cut along arc at bottom right of tool  path   N0070 G1 X 2  cut along bottom side of tool path   N0080 G2 X 2 3 Y 0 6 J0 5  cut along arc at bottom left of  tool path   N0090 G1 X1 7 Y2 4  cut along hypotenuse of tool path   N0100 G2 X2 Y2 5 I0 3 J 0 4  cut along arc at top of tool  path   N0110 G40  turn compensation off   This will result in the tool making an alignment move and two entry moves  and then  following a path slightly inside the path shown on the left in figure 10 1 going clockwise  around the triangle  This path is to the right of the programmed path even though G41 was  programmed  because the diameter value is negative     9 2 3  Programming Entry Moves  In general  an alignment move and an entry moves are needed to begin compensation  correctly  The tool should be at least a diameter away fro
125. arc  Program G2 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R   or  use G3 instead of G2   R is the radius  The axis words are all optional except that at least  one of the two words for the axes in the selected plane must be used  The R number is the  radius  A positive radius indicates that the arc turns through 180 degrees or less  while a  negative radius indicates a turn of 180 degrees to 359 999 degrees  If the arc is helical  the  value of the end point of the arc on the coordinate axis parallel to the axis of the helix is  also specified     It is an error if         both of the axis words for the axes of the selected plane are omitted         the end point of the arc is the same as the current point     It is not good practice to program radius format arcs that are nearly full circles or are  semicircles  or nearly semicircles  because a small change in the location of the end point  will produce a much larger change in the location of the center of the circle  and  hence  the  middle of the arc   The magnification effect is large enough that rounding error in a number  can produce out of tolerance cuts  Nearly full circles are outrageously bad  semicircles  and  nearly so  are only very bad  Other size arcs  in the range tiny to 165 degrees or 195 to 345  degrees  are OK     Here is an example of a radius format command to mill an arc     G17 G2 x 10 y 15 r 20 z 5     That means to make a clockwise  as viewed from the positive Z axis  circular or helical arc  whose axis is parallel to the Z 
126. ass scale encoder  awaiting installation      Figure 4 16     Encoder DROs    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 15    4 13  Charge pump   a pulse monitor    Mach3 will output a constant pulse train whose frequency is approximately 12 5 kHZ on  one or both of the parallel ports whenever it is running correctly  This signal will not be  there if the Mach3 has not been loaded  is in EStop mode or if the pulse train generator fails  in some way  You can use this signal to charge a capacitor through a diode pump  hence the  name  whose output  showing Mach3 s health  enables your axis and spindle drives etc   This function is often implemented in commercial breakout boards     4 14  Other functions    Mach3 has fifteen OEM Trigger input signals which you can assign for your own use  For  example they can be used to simulate clicking a button or to call a user written macros     In addition there are four user inputs which can be interrogated in user macros     Input  1 can be used to inhibit running of the part program  It might be connected to the  guards on your machine     Full details of the architecture of Input Emulation are given in Mach3 Customisation wiki   The setup dialog is defined in section 5     The Relay Activation outputs not used for the Spindle and Coolant can be used by you and  controlled in user written macros     And a final thought   before you get carried away with implementing too many of the  features in 
127. axis  ending where X 10  Y 15  and Z 5  with a radius of  20  If the starting value of Z is 5  this is an arc of a circle parallel to the XY plane   otherwise it is a helical arc     10 7 3 2 Center Format Arc  In the center format  the coordinates of the end point of the arc in the selected plane are  specified along with the offsets of the center of the arc from the current location  In this  format  it is OK if the end point of the arc is the same as the current point  It is an error if         when the arc is projected on the selected plane  the distance from the current point  to the center differs from the distance from the end point to the center by more  than 0 0002 inch  if inches are being used  or 0 002 millimetre  if millimetres are  being used    The center is specified using the I and J words  There are two ways of interpreting them   The usual way is that I and J are the center relative to the current point at the start of the arc   This is sometimes called Incremental IJ mode  The second way is that I and J specify the  center as actual coordinates in the current system  This is rather misleadingly called  Absolute IJ mode  The IJ mode is set using the Configure gt State    menu when Mach3 is set    G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 18    up  The choice of modes are to provide compatibility with commercial controllers  You will  probably find Incremental to be best  In Absolute it will  of course usually be necessary to  use both I and
128. can reuse a line that you have already  entered  The Enter key causes Mach3 to execute the  current MDI line and it remains active for input of  another set of commands  The Esc key clears the line  and de selects it  You need to remember that when it is  selected all keyboard input  and input from a keyboard  emulator or custom keyboard  is written in the MDI line  rather than controlling Mach3  In particular  jogging  keys will not be recognised  you must Esc after entering  MDI     Mach3 can remember all the MDI lines as it executes  them and store them in a file by using the Teach  facility  Click Start Teach  enter the required commands  and then click Stop Teach  The LED blinks to remind  you that you are in Teach Mode  The commands are  written in the file with the conventional name   C  Mach3 GCode MDITeach tap  Clicking Load Edit  will load this file into Mach3 where it can be run or  edited in the usual way     you need to go to the Program  Run screen to see it  If you wish to keep a given set of  taught commands then you should Edit the file and use  Save As in the editor to give it your own name and put it  in a convenient folder     6 2 5  Jogging control family  Jogging controls are collected on a special screen which  flys out into use when the Tab key is pressed on the  keyboard  It is hidden by a second press of Tab     This is illustrated in figure 6 6     Whenever the Jog ON OFF button is displayed on the current screen then the axes of the  machine can be
129. ches   the guard interlock and limit switches    Mach3 will store the properties of up to 256 different tools  If  however  your machine has  an automatic tool changer or magazine then you will have to control it yourself     4 3  The EStop control    Every machine tool must have one or more Emergency Stop  EStop  buttons  usually with a  big red mushroom head  They must be fitted so that you can easily reach one from wherever  you might be when you are operating the machine     Each EStop button should stop all activity in the machine as quickly as is safely possible   the spindle should stop rotating and the axes should stop moving  This should happen  without relying on software   so we are talking about relays and contactors  The circuit  should tell Mach3 what you have done and there is a special  mandatory input for this  It  will generally not be good enough to turn off the AC power for an EStop because the  energy stored in DC smoothing capacitors can allow motors to run on for some considerable  time     The machine should not be able to run again until a  reset  button has been pressed  If the  EStop button locks when pushed then the machine should not start when you release it by  turning its head     It will not generally be possible to continue machining a part after an EStop but you and the  machine will at least be safe     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 3    4 4  The PC parallel port    4 4 1  The parallel p
130. come unreliable  Finally  it s worth noting you are  allowed roughly 20 times more current flowing into a  lo  than you are allowed flowing out  of a  hi    1 Some people think that integrated circuits work in some way by using smoke  Certainly no one has ever seen  one work after the smoke has escaped     1  13    14  25    socket  number    0 volts   common     Figure 4 1   Parallel port female connector   seen from back of PC     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 4    So this means that it is best to assign logic 1 to be a  lo  signal  Fairly obviously this is  called active lo logic  The main practical disadvantage of it is that the device connected to  the parallel port has to have a 5 volt supply to it  This is sometimes taken from the PC game  port socket or from a power supply in the device that is connected     Turning to input signals  the computer will need to be supplied with some current  less than  40 microamps  for  hi  inputs and will supply some  less than 0 4 milliamps  for  lo   inputs     Because modern computer motherboards combine many functions  including the parallel  port  into one chip we have experienced systems where the voltages only just obey the  hi   and  lo  rules  You might find that a machine tool that ran on and old system becomes  temperemental when you upgrade the computer  Pins 2 to 9 are likely to have similar  properties  they are the data pins when printing   Pin 1 is also vital in pri
131. connect to  a separate  0 volt  common  for the drives  home switches etc  and will avoid exceeding the permitted  current in and out of the port  This breakout board  your drive electronics and power supply  should be neatly installed in a metal case to minimise the risk of interference to your  neighbours  radio and television signals  If you build a  rat s nest  then you are inviting  short circuits and tragedy  Figure 4 2 shows three commercial breakout boards     Here ends the sermon     4 5  Axis drive options    4 5 1  Steppers and Servos  There are two possible types of motive power for axis drives         Stepper motor        Servo motor  either AC or DC     Either of these types of motor can  then drive the axes through  leadscrews  plain  or ball nut    belts  chains or rack and pinion   The mechanical drive method will  determine the speed and torque  required and hence any gearing  required between the motor and  machine     Properties of a bipolar stepper  motor drive are     1  Low cost  2  Simple 4 wire connection  to motor  3  Low maintenance    4  Motor speed limited to about 1000 rpm and torque limited to about 3000 ounce  inches   21 Nm   Getting the maximum speed depends on running the motor or the  drive electronics at their maximum permitted voltage  Getting the maximum torque  depends on running the motor at its maximum permitted current  amps   5  For practical purposes on a machine tool steppers need to be driven by a chopped  micro stepping controll
132. control family                                                                                   6 8  6 2 11 Work offset and tool table control family                                                                            6 9  6 2 11 1 Work Offsets                                                                                                           6 9  6 2 11 2 Tools                                                                                                                     6 10  6 2 11 3 Direct access to Offset Tables                                                                                6 10  6 2 12 Rotational Diameter control family                                                                                   6 10  6 2 13 Tangential control family                                                                                                 6 11    Contents    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  v    6 2 14 Limits and miscellaneous control family                                                                           6 11  6 2 14 1 Input Activation 4                                                                                                  6 11  6 2 14 2 Override limits                                                                                                      6 11  6 2 15 System Settings control family                                                                                         6 11  6 2 15 1 Units                        
133. ctions working  it s time to  configure the axis drives  The first thing to decide is  whether you wish to define their properties in  Metric  millimetres  or Inch units  You will be able  to run part programs in either units whichever  option you choose  The maths for configuration will  be slightly easier if you choose the same system as  your drive train  e g  the ballscrew  was made in  So  a screw with 0 2  lead  5 tpi  is easier to configure  in inches than in millimetres  Similarly a 2mm lead  screw will be easier in millimetres  The  multiplication and or division by 25 4 is not  difficult but is just something else to think about     There is  on the other hand  a slight advantage in  having the setup units be the units in which you usually work  This is that you can lock the  DROs to display in this system whatever the part program is doing  i e  switching units by  G20 and G21      So the choice is yours  Use Config gt Setup Units to choose MMs or Inches  see figure 5 10    Once you have made a choice you must not change it without going back over all the  following steps or total confusion will reign  A message box reminds you of this when you  use Config gt Setup units      Figure 5 10   Setup Units dialog    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 10    5 5  Tuning motors    Well after all that detail it s now time to get things moving   literally  This section describes  setting up your axis drives and  if its speed will be controlled by Mach3  the
134. d be configured     Figure 5 12 shows the button on the settings  screen to initiate this process  You will be  prompted for the axis that you wish to  calibrate     Then you must enter a nominal move  distance  Mach3 will make this move  Be  ready to press the EStop button if it seems to  be going to crash because your existing  settings are too far out     Finally after the move you will be prompted to measure and enter the exact distance that  was moved  This will be used to calculate the actual Steps per Unit of your machine axis      Figure 5 12     Automatic steps per unit    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 14    5 5 3  Deciding on acceleration    5 5 3 1  Inertia and forces  No motor is able to change the speed of a mechanism instantly  A torque is needed to give  angular momentum to the rotating parts  including the motor itself  and torque converted to  force by the mechanism  screw and nut etc   has to accelerate the machine parts and the tool  or workpiece  Some of the force also goes to overcome friction and  of course  to make the  tool cut     Mach3 will accelerate  and decelerate  the motor at a given rate  i e  a straight line speed  time curve  If the motor can provide more torque than is needed for the cutting  friction and  inertia forces to be provided at the given acceleration rate then all is well  If the torque is  insufficient then it will either stall  if a stepper  or the servo position error will increase  If  the servo error ge
135. d so see the model  from different angles  The set of axes in the top left hand corner show you what directions  are X  Y and Z  So if you drag the mouse from the centre in an upwards direction the   sphere  will turn showing you the Z axis and you will be able to see that the circle is  actually a spiral cut downwards  in the negative Z direction   Each of the G3 lines in the  Spiral program above draws a circle while simultaneously lowering the tool 0 2 in the Z  direction  You can also see the initial G00 move which is a straight line     You can if you wish produce a display like the conventional isometric view of the toolpath     A few minutes of  play  will soon give you confidence in what can be done  Your display  may be a different colour to that shown in figure 3 11  The colors can be configured  See  chapter 5     3 7 2  Panning and Zooming the toolpath display  The toolpath display can be zoomed by dragging the cursor in its window with the Shift key  depressed     The toolpath display can be panned in its window by dragging the cursor in the window  with the Right mouse button held     Double clicking the toolpath window restores the display to the original perpendicular view  with no zoom applied     Note  You cannot Pan or Zoom while the machine tool is running     3 8  Other screen features    Finally it is worth browsing through some of the other Wizards and all the screens     As a small challenge you might like to see if you can identify the following usefu
136. ding your work to the table     This manual tries to give you guidance on safety precautions and techniques  but because we do not know the details of your machine or local conditions we can accept  no responsibility for the performance of any machine or any damage or injury caused by its  use  It is your responsibility to ensure that you understand the implications of what you  design and build and to comply with any legislation and codes of practice applicable to your  country or state     If you are in any doubt you must seek guidance from a professionally qualified expert  rather than risk injury to yourself or to others     This document is intended to give enough details about how the Mach3Mill software  interacts with your machine tool  how it is configured for different axis drive methods and  about the input languages and formats supported for programming to enable you to  implement a powerful CNC system on a machine with up to six controlled axes  Typical  machine tools that can be controlled are mills  routers  plasma cutting tables     Although Mach3Mill can control the two axes of a lathe for profile turning or the like  a  separate program  Mach3Turn  and supporting documentation is being developed to  support the full functionality of a lathes etc     An online wiki format document Customising Mach3 explains in detail how to alter screen  layouts  to design your own screens and Wizards and to interface to special hardware  devices     You are strongly advised t
137. dle drive                            5 7  Pulley ratios Spindle  pulley ratios                                                  5 7  Pulleys  explanation of                                             5 16  setting max speed of                                    5 16  Pulse width modulated control  of motor speed                                            4 12  Pulse width modulated spindle See Spindle  PWM  Pulse widths  configuring                                                 5 13  PWM                            See Pulse width modulated  Base frequency                                           5 17  PWM speed control                   See also Spindle  PWM minimum speed limit                               5 7    R    Radius format arc                                          10 17  Rapid motion  G00 definrd                                              10 16  Reaming and boring canned cycle  G85                                                          10 28  Re boot during installation  how to manually uninstall driver if you fail to do  it                                                               3 4    reason for                                                      3 2  Recording your configuration                               1  Reference   G28 1                                         10 20  Reference switch  defining                                                        5 3  Referenced LED  described                                                       6 2  R
138. dly  can be difficult to fault find without being very systematic and or looking at the  pulses with an oscilloscope     5 5 2 2  Motor maximum speed calculations  If you feel that you want to calculate the maximum motor speed then read this section     There are many things which define the maximum speed of an axis         Maximum allowed speed of motor  perhaps 4000 rpm for servo or 1000 rpm for  stepper         Maximum allowed speed of the ballscrew  depends on length  diameter  how its  ends are supported        Maximum speed of belt drive or reduction gearbox        Maximum speed which drive electronics will support without signalling a fault        Maximum speed to maintain lubrication of machine slides  The first two in this list are most likely to affect you  You will need to refer to the  manufacturers  specifications  calculate the permitted speeds of screw and motor and relate  these to units per second of axis movement  Set this maximum value in the Velocity box of  Motor Tuning for the axis involved     The Mach1 Mach2 Yahoo  online forum is a useful place to get advice from other Mach3  users  world wide  on this sort of topic     5 5 2 3  Automatic setting of Steps per Unit  You might not be able to measure the gearing  of your axis drive or know the exact pitch of  a screw  Provided you can accurately measure  the distance moved by an axis  perhaps using  a dial test indicator and gage blocks  then you  can get Mach3 to calculate the steps per unit  that shoul
139. drawn by themselves allowing for the tool diameter  Because the  CAD CAM software has a better overall view of the shapes being cut it may    be able to do a better job than Mach3 can when avoiding gouges at sharp    internal corners     Having compensation in Mach3 allows you to   a  use a tool different in  diameter from that programmed  e g  because it has be reground  or  b  to  use a part program that describes the desired outline rather than the path of    the center of the tool  perhaps one written by hand      However  as compensation is not trivial  it is described in this chapter    should you need to use it     This feature is under development and may change significantly in the final    release of Mach3     9 1  Introduction to compensation    As we have seen Mach1  controls the movement  of the Controlled Point   In practice no tool   except perhaps a V   engraver  is a point so  cuts will be made at a  different place to the  Controlled Point  depending on the radius  of the cutter     It is generally easiest to  allow your CAD CAM  software to take account  of this when cutting out pockets or the outline of shapes     Mach3 does  however  support calculations to compensate for the diameter  radius  of the  cutter  In industrial applications this is aimed at allowing for a cutter which  through  regrinding  is not exactly the diameter of the tool assumed when the part program was  written  The compensation can be enabled by the machine operator rather than requ
140. ds  move the tool  here for simplicity     The jogging controls are of a special    fly out    screen  This is shown and hidden by using  the Tab key on the keyboard  Figure 3 4 gives a view of the flyout     You can use the keyboard for jogging  The arrow keys are set by default to give you  jogging on the X and Y axes and Pg Up PgDn jogs the Z axis  You can re configure these  keys  see Chapter 5  to suit your own preferences  You can use the jogging keys on any  screen with the Jog ON OFF button on it     In figure 3 4 you will see that the Step LED is shown lit  The Jog Mode button toggles  between Continuous  Step and MPG modes     In Continuous mode the chosen axis will jog for as long as you hold the key down  The  speed of jogging is set by the Slow Jog Percentage DRO  You can enter any value from  0 1  to 100  to get whatever speed you want  The Up and Down screen buttons beside  this DRO will alter its value in 5  steps  If you depress the Shift key then the jogging will  occur at 100  speed whatever the override setting  This allows you to quickly jog to near  your destination and the position accurately     In Step mode  each press of a jog key will move the axis by the distance indicated in the  Step DRO  You can set this to whatever value you like  Movement will be at the current  Feedrate  You can cycle through a list of predefined Step sizes with the Cycle Jog Step  button      Figure 3 4   Jog controls   use Tab key to show and hide  this     Overview of Mach
141. ds to dwell  program G89 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L  P          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Dwell for the P number of seconds          Retract the Z axis at the current feed rate to clear Z     10 7 25 Set Distance Mode   G90 and G91  Interpretation of Mach3 code can be in one of two distance modes  absolute or incremental     To go into absolute distance mode  program G90  In absolute distance mode  axis numbers   X  Y  Z  A  B  C  usually represent positions in terms of the currently active coordinate  system  Any exceptions to that rule are described explicitly in this section describing G   codes     To go into incremental distance mode  program G91  In incremental distance mode  axis  numbers  X  Y  Z  A  B  C  usually represent increments from the current values of the  numbers     I and J numbers always represent increments  regardless of the distance mode setting  K  numbers represent increments in all but one usage  the G87 boring cycle   where the  meaning changes with distance mode     10 7 26 Set IJ Mode   G90 1 and G91 1  Interpretation of the IJK values in G02 and G03 codes can be in one of two distance modes   absolute or incremental     To go into absolute IJ mode  program G90 1  In absolute distance mode  IJK numbers  represent absolute positions in terms of the currently active coordinate system     To go into incremental IJ mode  program G91 1  In incremental distance m
142. e  caused by the  inertia of the  drive  On an optical switch like figure 4 7 then provided the vane is long enough there will  be no difficulties  A microswitch can be given arbitrary overtravel by operating a roller on it  by a ramp  see figure 4 11   The slope of the ramp does  however  reduce the repeatability  of operation of the switch  It is often  possible to use one switch for both limits  by providing two ramps or vanes     4 6 3  Where to mount the  switches  The choice of mounting position for  switches is often a compromise between  keeping them away from swarf and dust  and having to use flexible rather than  fixed wiring     For example figures 4 6 and 4 8 are both  mounted under the table  despite the fact     Figure 4 8   Optical switch on table with vane on  bed of machine     Table   X   X    Frame     X and  Reference   X switch     Figure 4 9   Two switches operated by frame with overtravel avoided by  mechanical stops     Figure 4 10     Mill with tool at X 0  Y 0 position   note the dog is on limit switch     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 10    that they need a  moving cable  as  they are much  better protected  there     You might find it  convenient to  have one moving  cable with the  wires in it for  two or more axes  e g  the X and Y axes of a gantry router could have switches on the  gantry itself and a very short cable loop for the Z axis could then join the other two   Do not  be tempted to s
143. e DRO Touch Correction and    Table     Y   Z     Figure 7 5   Disaster at 0 0 0     Table     Y   Z     Figure 7 4   Now we want another color     Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  7 5    its associated button marked On Off for now     By default you will have Tool  0 selected but its offsets will be switched OFF     Information about the tool diameter is also used for Cutter Compensation  q v      7 3 1  Presettable tools  We will assume your machine has a tool   holder system which lets you put a tool in  at exactly the same position each time   This might be a mill with lots of chucks  or something like an Autolock chuck   figures 7 10 and 7 11   where the centre   hole of the tool is registered against a  pin   If your tool position is different each  time then you will have to set up the  offsets each time you change it  This will  be described later     In our drawing machine  suppose the  pens register in a blind hole that is 1   deep in the pen holder  The red pen is  4 2  long and the blue one 3 7  long     1  Suppose the machine has just been referenced homed and a work offset defined for the  corner of the paper with Z   0 0 being the table using the bottom face of the empty pen  holder  You would jog the Z axis up say to 5  and fit the blue pen  Enter  1   which will  be the blue pen  in the Tool number DRO but do not click Offset On Off to ON yet  Jog  the Z down to touch the paper  The Z axis DRO would read 2 7 as the 
144. e end of a cutting tool  is where things happen and is called the  Controlled Point  The Axis DROs in Mach3 always display the coordinates of the  Controlled Point relative to some coordinate system  The reason you are having to read this  chapter is that it is not always convenient to have the zeros of the measuring coordinate  system at a fixed place of the machine  like the corner of the table in our example      A simple example will show why this is so     The following part program looks  at first sight  suitable for drawing the 1  square in Figure  7 1     N10 G20 F10 G90  set up imperial units  a slow feed rate etc    N20 G0 Z2 0  lift pen   N30 G0 X0 8 Y0 3  rapid to bottom left of square   N40 G1 Z0 0  pen down   N50 Y1 3  we can leave out the G1 as we have just done one   N60 X1 8  N70 Y0 3  going clockwise round shape   N80 X0 8  N90 G0 X0 0 Y0 0 Z2 0  move pen out of the way and lift it   N100 M30  end program     Even if you cannot yet follow all the code it is easy to see what is happening  For example  on line N30 the machine is told to move the Controlled Point to X 0 8  Y 0 3  By line N60  the Controlled Point will be at X 1 8  Y 1 3 and so the DROs will read     X Axis 1 8000 Y Axis 1 3000 Z Axis 0 0000    The problem  of course  is that the square has not been drawn on the paper like in figure 7 1  but on the table near the corner  The part program writer has measured from the corner of  the paper but the machine is measuring from its machine zero position
145. e file import                                                   8 1    8 1  Introduction                                                                                                                      8 1    8 2  DXF import                                                                                                                      8 1  8 2 1  File loading                                                                                                                        8 2  8 2 2  Defining action for layers                                                                                                   8 2  8 2 3  Conversion options                                                                                                             8 3  8 2 4  Generation of G code                                                                                                         8 3    8 3  HPGL import                                                                                                                   8 4  8 3 1  About HPGL                                                                                                                      8 4  8 3 2  Choosing file to import                                                                                                       8 4  8 3 3  Import parameters                                                                                                              8 5  8 3 4  Writing the G code file       
146. e gage is entered into the Gage Block Height DRO and the Set Z  button is clicked  This will set up the Z value of the current work offset so that the tool is at  the given height     The process for X and Y is similar except the touching might be done on any of four sides  of the part and account has to be taken of the diameter of the tool  or probe  and the  thickness of any gage being used to give    feel    to the touching process     For example to set the bottom edge of a piece of material to be Y   0 0 with a tool of  diameter 0 5    and a 0 1    gage block  you would enter 0 7 in the Edge Finder Dia DRO  i e   the diameter of the tool plus twice the gage  and click the Select button that is ringed in  figure 6 12     Depending on your configuration of Persistent Offsets and Offsets Save in Config gt State the  new values will be remembered from one run of Mach3 to another     6 2 11 2 Tools  Tools are numbered from 0 to 255   The tool number is selected by the  T word in a part program or  entering the number in the T DRO   Its offsets are only applied if they  are switched On by the Tool Offset  On Off toggle button  or the  equivalent G43 and G49 in the part  program     In Mach3Mill only the Z offset and  Diameter are used for tools  The  diameter can be entered in the DRO  and the Z offset  i e  compensation  for tool length  be entered directly or by Touching  The Set Tool Offset feature works  exactly as set Z with with Work Offsets     Tool Offset data is made 
147. e has Z offset  0 1002   Figure 7 11 shows this process just before  clicking Set Tool Offset     If you have an accurate cylindrical gage  and a reasonable sized flat surface on the  top of the workpiece  then using it can be  even better than jogging down to a feeler  or slip gage  Jog down so that the roller  will not pass under the tool  Now very slowly jog up until you can just roll it under the tool   Then you can click the Touch button  There is an obvious safety advantage in that jogging a  bit too high does no harm  you just have to start again  Jogging down to a feeler or gage  risks damage to the cutting edges of the tool     7 6 2  Edge finding  It is very difficult to accurately set a mill  to an edge in X or Y due to the flutes of  the tool  A special edge finder tool helps  here  Figure 7 12 shows the minus X  edge of a part being found     The Touch Correction can be used here  as well  You will need the radius of the  probe tip and the thickness of any feeler  or slip gage     7 7  G52  amp  G92 offsets    There are two further ways of offsetting  the Controlled Point using G codes G52  and G92     When you issue a G52 you tell Mach3  that for any value of the controlled point   e g  X 0  Y  0  you want the actual  machine position offset by adding the    Figure 7 10   Using a slip gage when  touching Z offset on a mill     Figure 7 12   Edge finder in use on a mill     Figure 7 11     Entering Z offset data    Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    U
148. e limits     The defined limits only apply when switched on using the Software Limits toggle button    see Limits and Miscellaneous control family for details     If a part program attempts to move beyond a soft limit then it will raise an error     The softlimits values are also used to define the cutting envelope if Machine is selected for  the toolpath display  You may find them useful for this even if you are not concerned about  actual limits     5 6 1 4  G28 Home location  The G28 coordinates define the position in absolute coordinates to which the axes will  move when a G28 is executed  They are interpreted in the current units  G20 G21  and not  automatically adjusted if the units system is changed     5 6 2  Configure System Hotkeys  Mach3 has a set of  global hotkeys that can  be used for jogging or  to enter values into the  MDI line etc  These  keys are configured in  the System Hotkeys  Setup dialog  figure  5 17   Click on the  button for the required  function and then press  the key to be used as  hotkey  Its value will  be displayed on the  dialog  Take care to  avoid duplicate use of  a code as this can cause  serious confusion     This dialog also enables the codes for external buttons used as OEM Triggers to be defined     5 6 3  Configure Backlash  Mach3 will attempt to compensate for  backlash in axis drive mechanisms by  attempting to approach each required  coordinate from the same direction  While  this is useful in applications like drilling or  bori
149. e macros    7  Spindle On Off  M3  M4  M5     8  Coolant On Off  M7  M8  M9     9  Enable disable overrides  M48  M49     10  Dwell  G4     11  Set active plane  G17  G18  G18     12  Set length units  G20  G21     13  Cutter radius compensation On Off  G40  G41  G42     14  Tool table offset On Off  G43  G49     15  Fixture table select  G54   G58  amp  G59 P      16  Set path control mode  G61  G61 1  G64     17  Set distance mode  G90  G91     18  Set canned cycle return level mode  G98  G99     19  Home  or change coordinate system data  G10   or set offsets  G92   G94     20  Perform motion  G0 to G3  G12  G13  G80 to G89 as modified by G53    21  Stop or repeat  M0  M1  M2  M30  M47  M99      Table 10 9   Order of execution on a line     Mach2 screenshot pullout    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  11 1    11  Appendix 1   Mach3 screenshot pullout     Mill Program Run screen      Mill MDI screen     Mach2 screenshot pullout    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  11 2     Mill Toolpath screen     Mill Offsets screen      Mill Settings screen     Mach2 screenshot pullout    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  11 3       Mill Diagnostics screen     Sample schematic diagrams    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  12 1    12  Appendix 2   Sample schematic diagrams    12 1  EStop and limits using relays    Notes     1  This circuit is only illustrative of one possible solution to externally connected limit  switches  If you require reference switches then these should be separate and connected  to
150. e motor speed  This is only about 1750 rpm in the example  The limitation  would be even worse if the encoder gave more pulses per revolution  It will often be  necessary to use servo electronics with electronic gearing to overcome this limitation if you  have high count encoders     Finally one would check on available torque  On a servo motor less safety margin is  required than with a stepper motor because the servo cannot suffer from  lost steps   If the  torque required by the machine is too high then the motor may overheat or the drive  electronics raise an over current fault     Example 2   ROUTER GANTRY DRIVE    For a gantry router might need a travel of at least 60  on the gantry axis and a ballscrew for  this length will be expensive and difficult to protect from dust  Many designers would go  for a chain and sprocket drive     We might choose a minimum step of 0 0005   A drive chain sprocket of 20 teeth with 1 4   pitch chain gives 5  gantry movement per revolution of the sprocket  A stepper motor  ten  micro steps  gives 2000 steps per revolution so a 5 1 reduction  belt or gear box  is needed  between the motor and sprocket shaft   0 0005    5   2000 x 5      With this design if we get 500 rpm from the stepper then the rapid feed of 60  would   neglecting acceleration and deceleration time  take a reasonable 8 33 seconds     The torque calculation on this machine is more difficult than with the cross slide as  with  the mass of the gantry to be moved  inertia  du
151. e spindle is turning or not  If the speed override switch is enabled and not  set at 100   the speed will be different from what is programmed  It is OK to program S0   the spindle will not turn if that is done  It is an error if         the S number is negative     If a G84  tapping  canned cycle is active and the feed and speed override switches are  enabled  the one set at the lower setting will take effect  The speed and feed rates will still  be synchronized  In this case  the speed may differ from what is programmed  even if the  speed override switch is set at 100      10 10 3 Select Tool     T  To select a tool  program T  where the T number is the slot number in the tool changer  of  course a rack for manual changing  for the tool     Even if you have an automatic toolchanger  the tool is not changed automatically by the T  word  To do this use M06  The T word just allows the changer to get the tool ready     M06  depending on the settings in Config gt Logic  will operate the toolchanger or stop  execution of the part program so you can change the tool by hand  The detailed execution  of these changes is set in the M6Start and M6End macros  If you require anything special  you will have to customize these     The T word  itself  does not actually apply any offsets  Use G43 or G44  q v   to do this   The H word in G43 G44 specifies which tool table entry to use to get the tool offset  Notice  that this is different to the action when you type a tool slot number into t
152. e the VB script program it finds within it     The Operator gt Macros menu item displays a dialog which allows you to see the currently  installed macros  to Load  Edit and Save or Save As the text  The dialog also has a Help  button which will display the VB functions which can be called to control Mach3  For  example you can interrogate the position of axes  move axes  interrogate input signals and  control output signals     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 35    New macros can be written using an external editor program like Notepad and saved in the  Macros folder or you can load an existing macro within Mach3  totally rewrite it and save it  with a different file name     10 10 Other Input Codes    10 10 1 Set Feed Rate   F  To set the feed rate  program F     Depending on the setting of the Feed Mode toggle the rate may be in units per minute or  units per rev of the spindle     The units are those defined by the G20 G21 mode     Depending on the setting in Configure gt Logic a revolution of the spindle may be defined as  a pulse appearing on the Index input or be derived from the speed requested by the S word  or Set Spindle speed DRO     The feed rate may sometimes be overidden as described in M48 and M49 above     10 10 2 Set Spindle Speed   S  To set the speed in revolutions per minute  rpm  of the spindle  program S  The spindle  will turn at that speed when it has been programmed to start turning  It is OK to program an  S word whether th
153. e this function check Disable Flood Mist Relays     5 3 6 2  Spindle relay control  If the spindle speed is controlled by hand or by using a PWM signal then Mach3 can define  its direction and when to start and stop it  in response to M3  M4 and M5  by using two  outputs  The Port Pins for the outputs have already been defined on the Output Signals tab     If you control the spindle by Step and Direction then you do not need these controls  M3   M4 and M5 will control the pulse train generated automatically     If you do not want to use this function check Disable Spindle Relays     5 3 6 3  Motor Control  Check Use Motor Control if you want to use PWM or Step and Direction control of the  spindle  When this is checked then you can choose between PWM Control and Step Dir  Motor      Figure 5 8     Spindle Setup    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 7    PWM Control    A PWM signal is a digital signal  a  square  wave where the percentage of the time the  signal is high specifies the percentage of the full speed of the motor at which it should run     So  suppose you have a motor and PWM drive with maximum speed of 3000 rpm then  figure 4 12 would run the motor at 3000 x 0 2   600 RPM  Similarly the signal in figure  4 13 would run it at 1500 RPM     Mach3 has to make a trade off in how many different widths of pulse it can produce against  how high a frequency the square wave can be  If the frequency is 5 Hz the Mach3 running  with a 25000 Hz kernel speed ca
154. e to be used for more than one job  Figure 7 9  shows the two and three hole fixtures combined  You would of course have two entries in  the work offset corresponding to the offsets to be used for each  In figure 7 8 the Current  Coordinate system is shown set for using the two hole paper option     Table    Fixture    Figure 7 7   Machine with two pin  fixture    Table    Fixture     Figure 7 8   Three pin fixture    Table    Fixture     Y   Z     Figure 7 9   A double fixture    Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  7 7    7 6  Practicalities of  Touching     7 6 1  End mills  On a manual machine tool it is quite easy to  feel on the handles when a tool is touching  the work but for accurate work it is better to  have a feeler  perhaps a piece of paper or  plastic from a candy bar  or slip gage so you  can tell when it is being pinched  This is  illustrated on a mill in figure 7 10     On the Offset screen you can enter the  thickness of this feeler or slip gage into the  DRO beside the Set Tool Offset button  When  you use Sret Tool Offset to set an offset DRO  for a too  then the thickness of the gage will  be allowed for     For example suppose you had the axis DRO  Z    3 518 with the 0 1002  slip lightly held   Choose Tool  3 by typing 3 in the Tool DRO   Enter 0 1002 in the DRO in Gage Block  Height and click Set Tool Offset  After  the touch the axis DRO reads Z   0 1002   i e the Controlled Point is 0 1002  and  tool 3 will hav
155. each one in the  same place on the table and so will be necessary  to set the work offsets each time  Much better  would be to have a plate with pins sticking out of  it and to use pre punched paper to register on the  pins  You will probably recognise this as an  example of a typical fixture which has long been  used in machine shops  Figure 7 7 shows the  machine so equipped  It would be common for  the fixture to have dowels or something similar so  that it always mounts in the same place on the  table     We could now move Current Coordinate system  by setting the work offsets  1 to the corner of the  paper on the actual fixture  Running the example  program would draw the square exactly as before   This will of course take care of the difference in Z  coordinates caused by the thickness of the fixture   We can put new pieces of paper on the pins and  get the square in exactly the right place on each  with no further setting up     We might also have another fixture for three hole  paper  Figure 7 8  and might want to swap between the two and three pin fixtures for  different jobs so  work offset  2  could be defined  for the corner of  the paper on the  three pin fixture     You can  of course  define any point on  the fixture as the  origin of its offset  coordinate system   For the drawing  machine we would  want to make the  bottom left corner  of the paper be  X 0  amp  Y 0 and  the top surface of the fixture be Z 0     It is common for one physical fixture to be abl
156. ed  This  allows gentle corners to be smoother but avoids excessive rounding of sharp corners even  on machines with low acceleration on one or more axes  This feature is enabled in the  Configure Logic dialog and the limiting angle is set by a DRO  This setting will probably  need to be chosen experimentally depending on the characteristics of the machine tool and   perhaps  the toolpath of an individual job     10 2  Interpreter Interaction with controls    10 2 1 Feed and Speed Override controls  Mach3 commands which enable  M48  or disable  M49  the feed and speed override  switches  It is useful to be able to override these switches for some machining operations   The idea is that optimal settings have been included in the program  and the operator should  not change them     10 2 2 Block Delete control  If the block delete control is ON  lines of code which start with a slash  the block delete  character  are not executed  If the switch is off  such lines are executed     10 2 3 Optional Program Stop control  The optional program stop control  see Configure gt Logic  works as follows  If this control  is ON and an input line contains an M1 code  program execution is stopped at the end on  the commands on that line until the Cycle Start button is pushed     10 3  Tool File    Mach3 maintains a tool file for each of the 254 tools which can be used     Each data line of the file contains the data for one tool  This allows the definition of the tool  length  Z axis   tool d
157. eed or both      Any input not explicitly allowed is illegal and will cause the Interpreter to signal an error or  to ignore the line     Spaces and tabs are allowed anywhere on a line of code and do not change the meaning of  the line  except inside comments  This makes some strange looking input legal  For  example  the line g0x  0  12 34y 7 is equivalent to g0 x 0 1234 y7    Blank lines are allowed in the input  They will be ignored     Input is case insensitive  except in comments  i e   any letter outside a comment may be in  upper or lower case without changing the meaning of a line     10 5 1 Line Number  A line number is the letter N followed by an integer  with no sign  between 0 and 99999  written with no more than five digits  000009 is not OK  for example   Line numbers may  be repeated or used out of order  although normal practice is to avoid such usage  A line  number is not required to be used  and this omission is common  but it must be in the  proper place if it is used     10 5 2 Subroutine labels  A subroutine label is the letter O followed by an integer  with no sign  between 0 and  99999 written with no more than five digits  000009 is not permitted  for example    Subroutine labels may be used in any order but must be unique in a program although  violation of this rule may not be flagged as an error  Nothing else except a comment should  appear on the same line after a subroutine label     10 5 3 Word  A word is a letter other than N or O followed by a
158. eferencing  configure                                                    5 18  details of Mach3 actions                              4 10  Regen button                                                     6 9  Repeating part program indefinitely   M47    10 34  Repeating part program indefinitely   M99    10 34  Reset button  described                                                       6 1  Retrofitting old CNC machines  caution                                                   2 2  4 6  Return level after canned cycle  G98 G99                                                   10 32  Reverse Run button                                           6 7  Rewind button                                                   6 7  Rotate coordinate system  G68   setting                                             10 24  G69   clearing                                           10 24  Rotational axes  defined                                                        10 4  Rotational diameter correction  controls family                                            6 10  Roughing  automatic using Inhibit Z                            6 12  texhnique for use with DXF and HPGL import  files                                                        6 12  Run a demo part program                                3 10  run a G code program                                      3 10  Run from here button                                        6 7  Running G code program                                6 17    S 
159. el windows     Enter your first port s address  do not provide 0x prefix to say it is Hexadecimal as Mach3  assumes this   If necessary check Enabled for port 2 and enter its address     Now click the Apply button to save these values  This is most important  Mach3 will not  remember values when you change from tab to tab or close the Port  amp  Pins dialog  unless you Apply     5 2 2  Defining engine frequency  The Mach3 driver can work at a frequency of 25 000 Hz  pulses per second   35 000 Hz or  45 000 Hz depending on the speed of your processor and other loads placed on it when  running Mach3     The frequency you need depends on the maximum pulse rate you need to drive any axis at  its top speed  25 000 Hz will probably be suitable for stepper motor systems  With a 10  micro step driver like a Gecko 201  you will get around 750 RPM from a standard 1 8o  stepper motor  High pulse rates are needed for servo drives that have high resolution shaft  encoders on the motor  Further details are given in the section on motor tuning     Computers with a 1 GHz clock speed will almost certainly run at 35 000 Hz so you can  choose this if you need a higher step rate  e g  if you have very fine pitch lead screws      The demonstration version will only run at 25 000 Hz  In addition if Mach3 is forcibly  closed then on re start it will automatically revert to 25 000 Hz operation  The actual  frequency in the running system is displayed on the standard Diagnostics screen     Don t forg
160. elete control                                                                                                         10 7  10 2 3 Optional Program Stop control                                                                                         10 7    10 3  Tool File                                                                                                                          10 7    10 4  The language of part programs                                                                                      10 7  10 4 1 Overview                                                                                                                         10 7  10 4 2 Parameters                                                                                                                       10 8  10 4 3 Coordinate Systems                                                                                                          10 9    10 5  Format of a Line                                                                                                           10 10  10 5 1 Line Number                                                                                                                  10 10  10 5 2 Subroutine labels                                                                                                            10 10  10 5 3 Word                                                                                                                           
161. em origin  i e   machine zero  is then set to given X  Y  Z etc  values   frequently 0 0  You can actually  define a non zero value for the home switches if you want but ignore this for now     The Z home switch is generally set at the highest Z position above the table  Of course if  the reference position is machine coordinate Z 0 0 then all the working positions are lower  and will be negative Z values in machine coordinates     Again if this is not totally clear at present do not worry  Having the Controlled Point  tool   out of the way when homed is obviously practically convenient and it is easy to use the  work offset s  to set a convenient coordinate system for the material on the table     7 3  What about different  lengths of tool     If you are feeling confident so far then  it is time to see how to solve another  practical problem     Suppose we now want to add a red  rectangle to the drawing     We jog the Z axis up and put the red  pen in the holder in place of the blue  one  Sadly the red pen is longer than  the blue one so when we go to the Current Coordinate System origin the tip smashes into  the table   Figure 7 5     Mach3  like other CNC controllers  has  a way for storing information about the  tools  pens in our system   This Tool  Table allows you to tell the system  about up to 256 different tools     On the Offsets screen you will see  space for a Tool number and  information about the tool  The DROs  are labelled Z offset  Diameter and T   Ignore th
162. emental distance mode  so that the same    G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 26    sequence of motions is repeated in several equally spaced places along a straight line  In  absolute distance mode  L  gt  1 means  do the same cycle in the same place several times    Omitting the L word is equivalent to specifying L 1  The L number is not sticky     When L gt 1 in incremental mode with the XY plane selected  the X and Y positions are  determined by adding the given X and Y numbers either to the current X and Y positions   on the first go around  or to the X and Y positions at the end of the previous go around  on  the repetitions   The R and Z positions do not change during the repeats     The height of the retract move at the end of each repeat  called  clear Z  in the descriptions  below  is determined by the setting of the retract mode  either to the original Z position  if  that is above the R position and the retract mode is G98   or otherwise to the R position     It is an error if         X  Y  and Z words are all missing during a canned cycle         a P number is required and a negative P number is used         an L number is used that does not evaluate to a positive integer         rotational axis motion is used during a canned cycle         inverse time feed rate is active during a canned cycle         cutter radius compensation is active during a canned cycle     When the XY plane is active  the Z number is sticky  and it is an error if   
163. ent version this features does not work with arcs  G2 G3 moves   It is your  responsibility to program curves as a series of G1 moves     4 10  Digitise probe    Mach3 can be connected to a contact digitising probe to make a measuring and model  digitising system  There is an input signal that indicates that the probe has made contact and  provision for an output to request that a reading is taken by a non contact  e g  laser  probe     To be useful the probe needs to have an accurately spherical end  or at least a portion of a  sphere  mounted in the spindle with its center accurately on the centerline of the spindle and  a fixed distance from a fixed point in the Z direction  e g  the spindle nose   To be capable  of probing non metallic materials  and many models for digitisation will be made in foam   MDF or plastic  the probe requires to make  or break  a switch with a minute deflection of  its tip in any  XY or Z  direction   If the probe is to be used with an automatic toolchanger  then it also needs to be  cordless      These requirements are a major challenge for the designer of a probe to be built in a home  workshop and commercial probes are  not cheap     A development feature is  implemented to allow the use of a  laser probe     4 11  Linear  glass scale   encoders    A    B    Start    x  y    typically  20 microns     Figure 4 14   Quadrature signals    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 14    Mach3 has four pai
164. ep pulses will be sent to the master and slave axes  with the speed and acceleration being determined by the  slower  of the two     When a reference operation is requested they will move together until the home switch of  one is detected  This drive will position just off the switch in the usual way but the other  axis will continue until its switch is detected when it will be positioned off it  Thus the pair  of axes will be  squared up  to the home switch positions and any racking which has  occurred be eliminated     Although Mach3 keeps the master and  slaves axes in step  the DRO of the slave  axis will not display offsets applied by the  Tool table  fixture offsets etc  Its values  may thus be confusing to the operator  We  therefore recommend that you use the  Screen Designer to remove the axis DRO  and related controls from all the screens  except Diagnostics  Save As the new design  with a name other than the default and use  the View gt Load Screen menu to load it into  Mach3     5 6 5  Configure Toolpath  Config gt Toolpath allows you to define how the toolpath is displayed  The dialog is shown in  figure 5 20    Origin sphere  when checked  displays a blob at the point of the toolpath display  representing X 0  Y 0   Z 0    3D Compass  when  checked  shows arrows  depicting the directions of  positive X  Y and Z in the  toolpath display     Machine boundaries  when  checked displays a box  corresponding to the  settings of the Softlimits   whether or not they are
165. ept that at least one of them must  be used  The tool in the spindle must be a probe     It is an error if         the current point is less than 0 254 millimetre or 0 01 inch from the programmed  point         G31 is used in inverse time feed rate mode         any rotational axis is commanded to move         no X  Y  or Z axis word is used     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 21    In response to this command  the machine moves the controlled point  which should be at  the end of the probe tip  in a straight line at the current feed rate toward the programmed  point  If the probe trips  the probe is retracted slightly from the trip point at the end of  command execution  If the probe does not trip even after overshooting the programmed  point slightly  an error is signalled     After successful probing  parameters 2000 to 2005 will be set to the coordinates of the  location of the controlled point at the time the probe tripped and a triplet giving X  Y and Z  at the trip will be written to the triplet file if it has been opened by the M40  macro OpenDigFile   function  q v      10 7 12 2 Using the Straight Probe Command  Using the straight probe command  if the probe shank is kept nominally parallel to the Z   axis  i e   any rotational axes are at zero  and the tool length offset for the probe is used  so  that the controlled point is at the end of the tip of the probe          without additional knowledge about the probe  the parallelism of a face
166. er  N word  on it  It  and the following code  will normally be  written with other subroutines and follow either an M2  M30 or M99 so it is not reached  directly by the flow of the program      b  To call a subroutine which is in a separate file code M98 filename L     for example M98  test tap     For both formats     The L word  or optionally the Q word  gives the number of times that the subroutine is to  be called before continuing with the line following the M98  If the L  Q  word is omitted  then its value defaults to 1     By using parameters values or incremental moves a repeated subroutine can make several  roughing cuts around a complex path or cut several identical objects from one piece of  material     Subroutine calls may be nested  That is to say a subroutine may contain a M98 call to  another subroutine  As no conditional branching is permitted it is not meaningful for  subroutines to call themselves recursively     10 8 8 Return from subroutine  To return from a subroutine program M99 Execution will continue after the M98 which  called the subroutine     If M99 is written in the main program  i e  not in a subroutine  then the program will start  execution from the first line again  See also M47 to achieve the same effect     10 9  Macro M codes    10 9 1 Macro overview  If any M code is used which is not in the above list of built in codes then Mach3 will  attempt to find a file named  Mxx M1S  in the Macros folder  If it finds the file then it will  execut
167. er like the so   called Wizards in much  Windows software that guide  you through the information  required for a task  The  classic Windows Wizard will  handle tasks line importing a  file to a database or  spreadsheet  In Mach3   examples of Wizards include     Figure 3 5     In the middle of teaching a rectangle     Figure 3 6     Taught program running     Figure 3 7     Table of Wizards from Wizard menu    Overview of Mach3 software    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3 9    cutting a circular pocket  drilling a grid of holes  digitising the surface of a model part     It is easy to try one out  In the Program Run screen click Load Wizards  A table of the  Wizards installed on your system will be displayed  figure 3 7   As an example click on the  line for Circular pocket  which is in the standard Mach3 release  and click Run     The Mach3 screen currently displayed will be replaced by the one shown in figure 3 8  This  shows the screen with some default options  Notice that you can choose the units to work  in  the position of the centre of the pocket  how the tool is to enter the material and so on   Not all the options might be relevant to your machine  You may  for example  have to set  the spindle speed manually  In this case you can ignore the controls on the Wizard screen     When you are satisfied with  the pocket  click the Post  Code button  This writes a G   code part program and loads  it into Mach3  This is just an  automation of what you did  in the example on
168. er to ensure smooth operation at any speed with reasonable  efficiency     6  Provides open loop control which means it is possible to lose steps under high  loading and this may not immediately be obvious to the machine user     On the other hand a servo motor drive is     1  Relatively expensive  especially if it has an AC motor   2  Needs wiring for both the motor and encoder  3  Maintenance of brushes is required on DC motors    4  Motor speed 4000 rpm plus and a practically unlimited torque  if your budget can  stand it      5  Provides closed loop control so drive position is always known to be correct  or a  fault condition will be raised      Figure 4 3   Small DC servo motor with encoder  left   and gearbox     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 6    In practice stepper motor drives will give satisfactory performance with conventional  machine tools up to a Bridgeport turret mill or a 6  centre height lathe unless you want  exceptional accuracy and speed of operation     It is worth giving two warnings here  Firstly servo systems on old machines are probably  not digital  i e  they are not controlled by a series of step pulses and a direction signal  To  use an old motor with Mach3 you will need to discard the resolver  which gave the  position  and fit a quadrature encoder and you will have to replace all the electronics   Secondly beware of secondhand stepper motors unless you can get manufacturer s data for  them  T
169. ering  If you choose the Dot  Diffusion rendering  method then you will  be asked for a  different set of  details  Dot diffusion   drills  a series of  dots  in a regular  grid  in the work   Typically these will  be formed by a V   pointed or bull nosed  tool  The depth of  each dot is  determined by the  shade of grey at the  point on the image   The number of dots  required to cover the  area is computed by  the filter on the basis  of the shape of the  tool and the depth   relief  of engraving  you select  Figure 9 7  illustrates the data  required  Each dot consists of a move to its location  a Z move to its depth and a Z move to  above the work  You must prepare your image with a suitable photo editor to have a  reasonable number of pixels to control the computation load when diffusing the dots  The  statistics obtained by the Check Stats button will give you an idea of how sensible your  choice of parameters has been     Now having defined the rendering technique you set the Safe Z at which moves over the  work will be done and choose if black or white is to be the deepest cut     8 4 5  Writing the G code file  Finally click Convert to actually import the data into Mach3Mill  You will be prompted for  the name to use for the file which will store the generated code  You should type the full  name including the extension which you wish to use or select an existing file to overwrite   Conventionally this extension will be  TAP     Notes         The import filter is run
170. ers   catalogues often include sample calculations     Unless you want the ultimate in performance from your machine  we recommend setting the  value so that test starts and stops sound  comfortable   Sorry it s not very scientific but it  seems to give good results     5 5 4  Saving and testing axis  Finally don t forget to click Save Axis Settings to save the acceleration rate before you move  on     You should now check your calculations by using the MDI to make a defined G0 move  For  a rough check you can use a steel rule  A more accurate test can be made with a Dial Test  Indicator  DTI  Clock and a slip gage block  Strictly this should be mounted in the  toolholder but for a conventional mill you can use the frame of the machine as the spindle  does not move relative to the frame in the X Y plane     Suppose you are testing the X axis and have a 4  gage block     Use the MDI screen to select inch units and absolute coordinates   G20 G90  Set up a clamp  on the table and Jog the axis so the DTI probe touches it  Ensure you finish by a move in  the minus X direction     Rotate the bezel to zero the reading  This is illustrated in figure 5 13     Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 15    Now use the Mach3 MDI  screen and click the G92X0  button to set an offset and  hence zero the X axis  DRO     Move the table to X   4 5  by G0 X4 5  The gap  should be about half an  inch  If it is not then there  is something badly wrong  with your calculations of  the 
171. ersa so as to preserve the aspect ratio of the original photograph  If the  image is in colour it will be converted to monochrome as it is imported     8 4 2  Choose type of rendering  Next you select  the method of  rendering the  image  This is  defining the path  of the tool as it   rasterises  the  image  Raster  X Y cuts along  the X axis  moving the Y  axis at the end of  each X line   Raster Y X  makes the raster  lines be in the Y  direction  incrementing X  for each line   Spiral starts at  the outside of a  circle bounding  the image and  moves in to the  centre  Each  raster line is  made up of a  series of straight     Figure 8 6     Defining the Step over     Figure 8 5     Size of photographic import     DXF  HPGL and image file import    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  8 7    lines with the height of the Z coordinates of the ends depending on the shade of grey of that  part of the picture     8 4 3  Raster and spiral rendering  As you select one of these raster methods you will be prompted by a dialog for the step   over values  See figure 8 6  These define the distance between raster lines and the length of  the short segments making up each line  The total number of moves is the XSize    X Step   Over x YSize    Y Step Over and  of course  increases as the square of the size of the object  and the inverse square of the size of step over  You should start with a modest resolution to  avoid impossibly big files and long cutting times     8 4 4  Dot diffusion rend
172. ess than one for millimetres but this makes no difference to the calculation which is easiest  done on a calculator anyway     For a screw and nut you need the raw pitch of the screw  i e  thread crest to crest distance   and the number of starts  Inch screws may be specified in threads per inch  tpi   The pitch is  1 tpi  e g  the pitch of an 8 tpi single start screw is 1    8   0 125      If the screw is multiple start multiply the raw pitch by the number of starts to get the  effective pitch  The effective screw pitch is therefore the distance the axis moves for one  revolution of the screw     Now you can calculate the screw revs per unit  screw revs per unit   1    effective screw pitch    If the screw is directly driven from the motor then this is the motor revs per unit  If the  motor has a gear  chain or belt drive to the screw with Nm teeth on the motor gear and Ns  teeth on the screw gear then   motor revs per unit   screw revs per unit x Ns   Nm    For example  suppose our 8 tpi screw is connected to the motor with a toothed belt with a  48 tooth pulley on the screw and an 16 tooth pulley on the motor then the motor shaft pitch  would be 8 x 48    16   24  Hint  keep all the figures on your calculator at each stage of  calculation to avoid rounding errors     As a metric example  suppose a two start screw has 5 millimetres between thread crests  i e   effective pitch is 10 millimetres  and it is connected to the motor with 24 tooth pulley on  the motor shaft and a 
173. est you to  change the pulley ratio give a lower speed range  For example  with a maximum speed of  10 000 rpm on pulley 4 and a minimum percentage of 5  then S499 would request a  different pulley  This feature is to avoid operating the motor or its controller at a speed  below its minimum rating    Mach3 uses the pulley ratio information as follows         When the part program executes an S word or a value is entered into the set speed  DRO then the value is compared with the maximum speed for the currently     Figure 5 15   Pulley spindle drive    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 17    selected pulley  If the requested speed is greater than the maximum then an error  occurs         Otherwise the percentage of the maximum for the pulley that has been requested  and this is used to set the PWM width or Step pulses are generated to produce that  percentage of the maximum motor speed as set in Motor Tuning for the  Spindle  Axis    As an example suppose the max spindle speed for Pulley  1 is 1000 rpm  S1100 would be  an error  S600 would give a pulse width of 60   If the maximum Step and Direction speed  is 3600 rpm then the motor would be  stepped  at 2160 rpm  3600 x 0 6      5 5 6 2  Pulse width modulated spindle controller  To configure the spindle motor for PWM control  check the Spindle Axis Enabled and  PWM Control boxes on the Port and Pins  Printer Port and Axis Selection Page tab  figure  5 1   Don t forget to Apply the changes  Define an output 
174. et to Z    0 6  so  c  enter 7 in L  Loop   On pressing Cycle Start the machine  will automatically make the series of cuts at increasing Z depth  The DROs track the  progress decrementing L as they are performed and updating the Z inhibit value  If the  given number of L does not reach the part program s requested Z depth then you can update  the L DRO and restart the program     6 2 18 Laser Trigger output family  Mach3 will output a pulse on the Digitise Trigger Out Pin   if defined  when the X or Y axes pass through trigger  points     The Laser Trigger group of controls allows you to define  the grid points in the current units and relative to an  arbitrary datum     Click Laser Grid Zero when the controlled point is at the  desired grid origin  Define the positions of the grid lines in  X and Y axes and click Toggle to enable the output of  pulses whenever an axis crosses a grid line     This feature is experimental and subject to change in later  releases     6 2 19 Custom controls families  Mach3 allows a machine builder  which could be you or your supplier  to add a whole range  of features by custom screens which can have DROs  LEDs and buttons which are used by  VB Script programs  either attached to the buttons or run from macro files   Examples of  such facilities are given in the Mach3 Customisation manual  These example also show how  different Mach3 screens can look to suit different applications even though they perform  essentially the same function required
175. et to click the Apply button before proceeding     5 2 3  Defining special features  You will see check boxes for a variety of special configuration  The should be self   explanatory if you have the relevant hardware in your system  If not then leave then  unchecked     Don t forget to click the Apply button before proceeding     5 3  Defining input and output signals that you will use    Now that you have established the basic configuration it is time to define which input and  output signals you will be going to use and which parallel port and pin will be used for  each  The documentation for your breakout board may give guidance on what outputs to use  if it has been designed for use with Mach3 or the board may be supplied with a skeleton  Profile   XML  file with these connections already defined     5 3 1 Axis and Spindle output signals to be used  First view the Motor Outputs tab  This will look like figure 5 4     Define where the drives for your X  Y and Z axes are connected and click to get a check   mark to Enable these axes  If your interface hardware  e g  Gecko 201 stepper driver   requires an active lo signal ensure that these columns are checked for the Step and  Dir ection  signals     If you have a rotary or slaved axes then you should enable and configure these     Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 3    If your spindle speed will be controlled by hand then you have finished this tab  Click the  Apply button to save the data on this tab    
176. f the sequence of M3 M5 and the moves in the Z direction is compatible  with initiating and finishing a cut correctly         For milling you will have to make your own manual allowances for the diameter of  the cutter  The HPGL lines will be the path of the centreline of the cutter  This  allowance is not straightforward to calculate when you are cutting complex  shapes         The program generated from a HPGL file does not have multiple passes to rough  out a part or clear the centre of a pocket  To achieve these automatically you will  need to use a CAM program    DXF  HPGL and image file import    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  8 6    8 4  Bitmap import  BMP  amp  JPEG     This option allows you to import a  photograph and generate a G code  program which will render different  shades of grey a different depths of  cut  The result is a photo realistic  engraving     8 4 1  Choosing file to  import  The import filter is accessed from  File gt Import HPGL BMP JPG and  the JPG BMP button on the dialog     The first step is to define the file  containing the image using the  Load Image File button  When the  file is loaded a dialog prompts you  for the area on the workpiece into  which the image is to be fitted  You  can use inch or metric units as you  wish depending on the G20 21  mode in which you will run the generated part program  Figure 8 5 shows this dialog  The  Maintain Perspective checkbox automatically computes the Y size if a given X size is  specified and vice v
177. f you have defined softlimits which correspond to the size of your machine table then it is  often useful to use the Display Mode button to toggle from Job to Table mode to show the  toolpath in relation to the table  See figure 6 11    The toolpath display can be  rotated by left clicking and  dragging the mouse in it  It  can be zoomed by shift left  clicking and dragging and  can be panned by dragging  a right click     The Regenerate button will  regenerate the toolpath  display from the G code  with the currently enabled  fixture and G92 offsets     Note  It is very important  to regenerate the toolpath  after changing the values of offsets both to get the correct visual effect and because it is  used to perform calculations when using G42 and G43 for cutter compensation      6 2 11 Work offset and tool table control family  Work Offset and Tool tables can be accessed from the Operator menu and  of course  within  a part program but it is often most convenient to manipulate them through this family  Refer  to chapter 7 for details of the tables and techniques like  Touching      Because of the underlying G code definitions Work Offset and Tool tables work in slightly  different ways     Warning  Changing the Work and Tool offsets in use will never actually move the tool on  the machine although it will of course alter the axis DRO readings  However  a move G0   G1 etc   after setting  new offsets will be in the  new coordinate system   You must understand  what you are d
178. fety  guards are not in place  The other three  and  1 if not used for the guard interlock  are  available for your own use and can be tested in the code of macros  The Input  4 can be  used to connect an external pushbutton switch to implement the Single Step function  You  may wish to configure them later     Enable and define Index Pulse if you have a spindle sensor with just one slot or mark     Enable and define Limits Override if you are letting Mach2 control your limit switches and  you have an external button which you will press when you need to jog off a limit  If you  have no switch then you can use a screen button to achieve the same function     Enable and define EStop to indicate to Mach3 that the user has demanded an emergency  stop     Enable and define OEM Trigger inputs if you want electrical signals to be able to call OEM  button functions without a screen button needing to be provided     Enable and define Timing if you have a spindle sensor with more than one slot or mark     Enable Probe for digitising and THCOn  THCUp and THCDown for control of a Plasma  torch     If you have one parallel port then you have 5 available inputs  with two ports there are 10   or with pins 2 to 9 defined as inputs  13   It is very common to find that you are short of  input signals especially if you are also going to have some inputs for glass scales or other  encoders  You may have to compromise by not having things like a physical Limit Override  switch to save signals   
179. for acceleration or deceleration     10 1 7 Arc Motion  Any pair of the linear axes  XY  YZ  XZ  can be controlled to move in a circular arc in the  plane of that pair of axes  While this is occurring  the third linear axis and the rotational  axes can be controlled to move simultaneously at effectively a constant rate  As in co   ordinated linear motion  the motions can be co ordinated so that acceleration and  deceleration do not affect the path     If the rotational axes do not move  but the third linear axis does move  the trajectory of the  controlled point is a helix     The feed rate during arc motion is as described in Feed Rate above  In the case of helical  motion  the rate is applied along the helix  Beware as other interpretations are used on other  systems     10 1 8 Coolant  Flood coolant and mist coolant may each be turned on independently  They are turned off  together     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 6    10 1 9 Dwell  A machining system may be commanded to dwell  i e   keep all axes unmoving  for a  specific amount of time  The most common use of dwell is to break and clear chips or for a  spindle to get up to speed  The units in which you specify Dwell are either seconds or  Milliseconds depending on the setting on Configure gt Logic    10 1 10 Units  Units used for distances along the X  Y  and Z axes may be measured in millimetres or  inches  Units for all other quantities involved in machine control cannot be changed   Diffe
180. gnals                                                                                                       5 4  5 3 4  Output Signals                                                                                                                   5 5  5 3 5  Defining encoder inputs                                                                                                      5 5  5 3 5 1  Encoders                                                                                                                 5 5  5 3 5 2  MPGs                                                                                                                      5 6  5 3 6  Configuring the spindle                                                                                                      5 6  5 3 6 1  Coolant control                                                                                                        5 6  5 3 6 2  Spindle relay control                                                                                                5 6  5 3 6 3  Motor Control                                                                                                         5 6  5 3 6 4  Modbus spindle control                                                                                           5 7  5 3 6 5  General Parameters                                                                                                  5 7  5 3 6 6  Pulley ratios                          
181. gt Load G code menu to load this program  You will notice that it is displayed in the G   code window     On the Program Run screen you can try the effect of the Start Cycle  Pause  Stop  and  Rewind buttons and their shortcuts     As you run the program you may notice that the highlighted line moves in a peculiar way in  the G code window  Mach3 reads ahead and plans its moves to avoid the toolpath having to  slow down more than in necessary  This lookahead is reflected in the display and when you  pause     You can go to any line of code scrolling the display so the line is highlighted  You can then  use Run from here      Figure 3 10     The result of Circular Pocket ready to run    Overview of Mach3 software    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3 11    Note  You should always run your programs  from a hard drive not a floppy drive or USB   key   Mach3 needs high speed access to the file   which it maps into memory  The program file  must not be read only     3 7  Toolpath display    3 7 1  Viewing the toolpath  The Program Run screen has a blank square on it  when Mach3 is first loaded  When the Spiral  program is loaded you will see it change to a  circle inside a square  You are looking straight  down on the toolpath for the programmed part   i e  in Mach3Mill you are looking perpendicular  to the X Y plane     The display is like a wire model of the path the tool will follow placed inside a clear sphere   By dragging the mouse over the window you can rotate the  sphere  an
182. gth of the cutting tool in use  so that the controlled  point is at the end of the cutting tool     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 5    10 1 5 Co ordinated Linear Motion  To drive a tool along a specified path  a machining system must often co ordinate the  motion of several axes  We use the term  co ordinated linear motion  to describe the  situation in which  nominally  each axis moves at constant speed and all axes move from  their starting positions to their end positions at the same time  If only the X  Y  and Z axes   or any one or two of them  move  this produces motion in a straight line  hence the word   linear  in the term  In actual motions  it is often not possible to maintain constant speed  because acceleration or deceleration is required at the beginning and or end of the motion  It  is feasible  however  to control the axes so that  at all times  each axis has completed the  same fraction of its required motion as the other axes  This moves the tool along the same  path  and we also call this kind of motion co ordinated linear motion     Co ordinated linear motion can be performed either at the prevailing feed rate  or at rapid  traverse rate  If physical limits on axis speed make the desired rate unobtainable  all axes  are slowed to maintain the desired path     10 1 6 Feed Rate  The rate at which the controlled point or the axes move is nominally a steady rate which  may be set by the user  In the Interpreter  the interpretation 
183. h V etc  is erroneous  like  using A twice on a line   In the detailed descriptions of codes U  V and W are not explicitly  mentioned each time but are implied by A  B or C     In the prototypes  the values following letters are often given as explicit numbers  Unless  stated otherwise  the explicit numbers can be real values  For example  G10 L2 could  equally well be written G 2 5  L 1 1   If the value of parameter 100 were 2   G10 L 100 would also mean the same  Using real values which are not explicit numbers  as just shown in the examples is rarely useful     If L  is written in a prototype the     will often be referred to as the  L number   Similarly  the     in H  may be called the  H number   and so on for any other letter     If a scale factor is applied to any axis then it will be applied to the value of the  corresponding X  Y  Z  A U  B V  C W word and to the relevant I  J  K or R words when  they are used     10 7 1 Rapid Linear Motion   G0   a  For rapid linear motion  program G0 X  Y  Z  A  B  C   where all the axis  words are optional  except that at least one must be used  The G0 is optional if the current  motion mode is G0  This will produce co ordinated linear motion to the destination point at  the current traverse rate  or slower if the machine will not go that fast   It is expected that  cutting will not take place when a G0 command is executing      b  If G16 has been executed to set a Polar Origin then for rapid linear motion to a point  described by
184. h are active when  Mach3 is loaded  i e  the initial state of the system   It is shown in figure 5 21     Motion mode  Constant velocity sets G64  Exact Stop sets G61  For details of these option  see Constant Velocity and Exact Stop in chapter 10     Distance mode  Absolute sets G 90  Inc sets G91    Active plane  X Y sets G17  Y Z sets G19  X Z sets G18    I J Mode  In addition you can set the interpretation to be placed on I  amp  J in arc moves  This  is provided for compatibility with different CAM post processor and to emulate other  machine controllers  In Inc IJ mode I and J  the center point  are interpreted as relative to    the starting point of a center format arc  This is compatible with NIST EMC  In Absolute IJ  mode I and J are the coordinates of the center in the current coordinate system  i e  after  application of work  tool and G92 offsets   If circles always fail to display or to cut properly   especially obvious by them being too big if they are far from the origin  then the IJ mode is  not compatible with you part program      Figure 5 21   Initial State configuration    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 22    An error in this setting is the most frequent cause of questions from users when trying  to cut circles     Initialization String  is a set of valid G codes to set the desired initial state of Mach3 when  it is started  These are applied after the values set in the radio buttons above so may  override them  Use the radio buttons 
185. happening     Because the commands of a G code program can request complicated co ordinated  movements of the machine axes the Machine Controller has to be able to perform a lot of  calculations in  real time   e g  cutting a helix requires a lot of trigonometrical calculation    Historically this made it an expensive piece of equipment     2 2  How Mach3 fits in    Mach3 is a software package which runs on a PC and turns it into a very powerful and  economical Machine Controller to replace  3  in figure 1 1     To run Mach3 you need Windows XP  or Windows 2000  ideally running on a 1GHz  processor with a 1024 x 768 pixel resolution screen  A desktop machine will give much  better performance than most laptops and be considerably cheaper  You can  of course use  this computer for any other functions in the workshop  such as  1  in figure 1 1   running a  CAD CAM package  when it is not controlling your machine     Mach3 communicates principally via one  or optionally two  parallel  printer  ports and  if  desired  a serial  COM  port     The drivers for your machine s axis motors must accept step pulses and a direction signal   Virtually all stepper motor drivers work like this  as do modern DC and AC servo systems  with digital encoders  Beware if you are converting an old NC machine whose servos may  use resolvers to measure position of the axes as you will have to provide a complete new  drive for each axis     Overview of Mach3 software    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3 
186. hare a multi way cable between motor and switch wiring  You may want to  run two separate cables together and this will not cause trouble if both a shielded  with  braid or foil  and the shields are grounded to one common point at the electronic drives     You might find it helpful to look at commercial machines and pictures of examples on the  Master5 Mach1 Mach2 Yahoo  group for more ideas and techniques for switches     4 6 4  How Mach3 uses shared switches  This section refers to the configuration for small machines where Mach3 rather than  external EStop logic is controlled by the switches     For a full understanding of this you will also have to read the section in chapter 5 on  configuring Mach3  but the basic principle is easy  You connect the two limit switches to  one input  or have one switch and two vanes or ramps   You define  to Mach3  a direction  as the direction to travel to move when looking for a reference switch  The limit switch   vane or ramp  at that end of the axis is also the home switch     In normal use when Mach3 is moving an axis and sees its limit input become active it will  stop running  like an EStop  and display that a limit switch has been tripped  You will be  unable to move the axes unless     1  Auto limit override is switched on  by a toggle button on the Settings screen   In this  case you can click Reset and jog off the limit switch  You should then reference the  machine  2  You click Override limits button  A red flashing LED warns 
187. he T DRO  In this  case an implied G43 is performed so the length offset for the tool will be applied assuming  that the slot number and the tooltable entry number are the same     It is OK  but not normally useful  if T words appear on two or more lines with no tool  change  It is OK to program T0  no tool will be selected  This is useful if you want the  spindle to be empty after a tool change  It is an error if         a negative T number is used  or a T number larger than 255 is used     10 11 Error Handling    This section describes error handling in Mach3     If a command does not work as expected or does not do anything check that you have typed  it correctly  Common mistakes are GO  instead of G0 i e  letter O instead of zero  and too    G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 36    many decimal points in numbers  Mach3 does not check for axis overtravel  unless software  limits are in use  or excessively high feeds or speeds  Nor does it does not detect situations  where a legal command does something unfortunate  such as machining a fixture     10 12 Order of Execution    The order of execution of items on a line is critical to safe and effective machine operation   Items are executed in the order shown in figure 10 9 if they occur on the same line      Order  Item    1  Comment  including message     2  Set feed rate mode  G93  G94  G95     3  Set feed rate  F     4  Set spindle speed  S     5  Select tool    6  Tool change  M6  and Execute M cod
188. hen their signal is active     These tests will let you see that your parallel port is correctly addressed and the inputs and  outputs are appropriately connected     If you have two ports and all the test signals are on one then you might consider a  temporary switch of your configuration so that one of the home or limit switches is  connected via it so that you can check its correct operation  Don t forget the Apply button  when doing this sort of testing  If all is well then you should restore the proper  configuration     If you have problems you should sort them out now as this will be much easier that when  you start trying to drive the axes  If you do not have a multimeter then you will have to buy  or borrow a logic probe or a D25 adaptor  with actual LEDs  which let you monitor the  state of its pins  In essence you need to discover if  a  the signals in and out of the computer  are incorrect  i e  Mach3 is not doing what you want or expect  or  b  the signals are not  getting between the D25 connector and your machine tool  i e  a wiring or configuration  problem with the breakout board or machine   15 minutes help from a friend can work  wonders in this situation even if you only carefully explain to him her what your problem is  and how you have already looked for it     You will be amazed how often this sort of explanation suddenly stops with words like          Oh  I see what the problem must be  it s           5 4  Defining the setup units    With the basic fun
189. hese are always the same  as each other     As you use the sliders the values in the Velocity and Accel boxes are updated  Velocity is in  units per minute  Accel is in units per second2  The acceleration values is also given in Gs to  give you a subjective impression of the forces that will be applied to a massive table or  workpiece     The maximum velocity you can display will be limited by the maximum pulse rate of  Mach3  Suppose you have configured this to 25 000 Hz and 2000 steps per unit then the  maximum possible Velocity is 750 units per minute     This maximum is  however  not necessarily safe for your motor  drive mechanism or  machine  it is just Mach3 running  flat out   You can make the necessary calculations or do  some practical trials  Let s just try it out first     5 5 2 1  Practical trials of motor speed  You saved the axis after setting the Steps per unit  OK the dialog and make sure that  everything is powered up  Click the Reset button so its LED glows continuously     Go back to Config gt Motor Tuning and select your axis  Use the Velocity slider to have the  graph about 20  of maximum velocity  Press the cursor Up key on your keyboard  The axis  should move in the Plus direction  If it runs away then choose a lower velocity  If it crawls  then choose a higher velocity  The cursor Down key will make it run the other way  i e  the  Minus direction      If the direction is wrong then  Save the axis and either  a  change the Low Active setting  for the D
190. hey might be designed for 5 phase operation  may not work well with a modern  chopped micro stepping controller and might have a much lower rated torque than the same  size of modern motor   Unless you can test them  you may find that they have been  accidentally demagnetised and so be useless  Unless you are really confident of your skills  and experience  then the axis drives should be current products bought from suppliers who  will support them  If you buy right then you will only need to buy once     4 5 2  Doing Axis drive calculations  A full set of calculations for the axis drives would be very complicated and anyway you  probably do not have all the necessary data  e g  what is the maximum cutting force you  want to use   Some calculation is  however  necessary for success     If you are reading the manual for an overview then you might like to skip this section     Fuller details of the calculations are given in chapter 5     Example 1   MILL TABLE CROSS SLIDE    We start with checking the minimum possible move distance  This is an absolute limit to  the accuracy of work done on the machine  We will then check rapid speeds and torque     As an example suppose you are designing a mill cross slide  Y axis  drive  You are going to  use a screw with a 0 1  pitch single start thread and a ball nut  You want to aim for a  minimum move of 0 0001   This is 1 1000 of a revolution of the motor shaft if it is coupled  directly to the screw     Slide with stepper motor    The m
191. highlighted and can be moved using the scroll bar on the window     The Toolpath display  figure 6 10  shows the path that the controlled point will follow in the  X  Y  Z planes  When a part program is executing the path is overpainted in the color  selected in Config gt Toolpath  This overpainting is dynamic and is not preserved when you  change screens or indeed alter views of the toolpath     On occasions you will find that the display does not exactly follow the planned path  It  occurs for the following reason  Mach3 prioritises the tasks it is doing  Sending accurate  step pulses to the machine tool is the first priority  Drawing the tool path is a lower priority   Mach3 will draw points on the toolpath display whenever it has spare time and it joins these  points by straight lines  So  if time is short  only a few points will be drawn and circles will     Figure 6 10   Toolpath family     Figure 6 9     Tool Details    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 9    tend to appear as polygons where the straight sides are very noticeable  This is nothing to  worry about     The Simulate Program Run button will execute the G code  but without any tool movement   and allow the time to make the part to be estimated     The Program Limits data allow you to check the maximum excursion of the controlled  point to be reasonable  e g  not milling the top off the table      The screenshot also shows axis DROs and some Program Run controls     I
192. iameter  for milling  and tool tip radius  for turning     10 4  The language of part programs    10 4 1 Overview  The language is based on lines of code  Each line  also called a  block   may include  commands to the machining system to do several different things  Lines of code may be  collected in a file to make a program     A typical line of code consists of an optional line number at the beginning followed by one  or more  words   A word consists of a letter followed by a number  or something that  evaluates to a number   A word may either give a command or provide an argument to a  command  For example  G1 X3 is a valid line of code with two words   G1  is a command  meaning  move in a straight line at the programmed feed rate   and  X3  provides an  argument value  the value of X should be 3 at the end of the move   Most commands start  with either G or M  for General and Miscellaneous   The words for these commands are  called  G codes  and  M codes      The language has two commands  M2 or M30   either of which ends a program  A program  may end before the end of a file  Lines of a file that occur after the end of a program are not  to be executed in the normal flow so will generally be parts of subroutines      G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 8    10 4 2 Parameters  A Mach3 machining system maintains an array of 10 320 numerical parameters  Many of  them have specific uses  The parameter which are associated with fixtures are persistent  
193. iew of Mach3 software    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  3 6    emulator board  e g  Ultimarc IPAC   This plugs   in in series with your keyboard and send Mach3   pretend  keypresses which activate buttons with  shortcuts     If a button does not appear on the current screen  then its keyboard shortcut is not active     There are certain special keyboard shortcuts  which are global across all screens  Chapter 5  shows how these are set up     3 2 3  Data entry to DRO  You can enter new data into any DRO by clicking  in it with the mouse  clicking its hotkey  where  set  or by using the global hotkey to select DROs  and moving to the one that you want with the  arrow keys     Try entering a feedrate like 45 6 on the Program  Run screen  You must press the Enter key to  accept the new value or the Esc key to revert to  the previous one  Backspace and Delete are not  used when inputting to DROs     Caution  It is not always sensible to put your  own data into a DRO  For example the display of  your actual spindle speed is computed by Mach3   Any value you enter will be overwritten  You can  put values into the axis DROs but you should not  do it until you have read Chapter 7 in detail  This  is not a way of moving the tool     3 3  Jogging    You can move the tool relative to any place on  your work manually by using various types of Jogging  Of course  on some machines  the  tool itself will move and on others it will be the machine table or slides that move  We will  use the wor
194. ig ure  menu  These are identified by  for example  Config gt Logic which means that  you choose the Logic entry from the Config menu     5 2  Initial configuration    The first dialog to use is Config gt Ports and Pins  This dialog has many tabs but the initial  one is as shown in figure 5 1     5 2 1  Defining addresses of port s  to use    If you are only going to use one parallel port and it is the one on your computer s  motherboard then the default address of Port 1 of 0x378  i e  Hexadecimal 378  is almost  certainly correct     If you are using one or more PCI add on cards then you will need to discover the address to  which each responds  There are no standards  Run the Windows Control Panel from the  Windows Start button  Double click on System and choose the Hardware tab  Click the  Device Manager button  Expand the tree for the item  Ports  COM  amp  LPT        Figure 5 1   Ports and Axis selection tab    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 2    Double click the first LPT or ECP port  Its properties will be displayed in a new window   Choose the Resources tab  The first number in the first IO range line is the address to use   Note the value down and close the Properties dialog     Note  that installing or removing any PCI card can change the address of a PCI parallel port  card even if you have not touched it     If you are going to use a second port repeat the above paragraph for it     Close the Device Manager  System Properties and Control Pan
195. ign screens from scratch so that you can add any  controls to a particular screen if your application requires this  For details see the Mach3  Customisation wiki     6 2 1  Screen switching controls  These controls appear on each screen  They allow switching between screens and also  display information about the current state of the system     6 2 1 1  Reset  This is a toggle  When the system is Reset the LED glows steadily  the charge pump pulse  monitor  if enabled  will output pulses and the Enable outputs chosen will be active     6 2 1 2  Labels  The  intelligent labels  display the last  error  message  the current modes  the file name of  the currently loaded part program  if any  and the Profile that is in use       Figure 6 1   Screen switching control family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 2    6 2 1 3  Screen selection buttons  These buttons switch the display from screen to screen  The keyboard shortcuts are given  after the names  For clarity in all cases when they are letters they are in upper case  You  should not  however  use the shift key when pressing the shortcut     6 2 2  Axis control family  This family is concerned with the current position of the tool  or more precisely  the  controlled point      The axes have the following controls     6 2 2 1  Coordinate value DRO  These are displayed in the current units  G20 G21  unless locked to the setup units on the  Config gt Logic dialog  The value is the coo
196. imes when you are  setting up a job or running a part program     This is easiest to explain looking at a machine  We have chosen an imaginary machine that  makes it easier to visualise how the coordinate system works  Figure 7 1 shows what it is  like     It is a machine for producing drawings with a ballpoint or felt tipped pen on paper or  cardboard  It consists of a fixed table and a cylindrical pen holder which can move left and  right  X direction   front and back  Y direction  and up and down  Z direction   The figure  shows a square which has just been drawn on the paper     Figure 7 2 shows the Machine Coordinate System which measures  lets say in inches  from  the surface of the table at its bottom left hand corner  As you will see the bottom left corner  of the paper is at X 2  Y 1 and Z 0  neglecting paper thickness   The point of the pen is at  X 3  Y 2 and it looks as though Z 1 3     If the point of the pen was at the corner of the table then  on this machine  it would be in its  Home or referenced position  This position is often defined by the position of Home  switches which the machine moves to when it is switched on  At any event there will be a    Table    Pen holder    Figure 7 1   Basic Drawing Machine    Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  7 2    zero position for each axis called the absolute machine zero  We will come back to where  Home might actually be put on a real machine     The point of the pen  like th
197. inimum step with a stepper motor depends on how it is controlled  There are usually  200 full steps per revolution  You need to use micro stepping for smooth running over the  full range of feed speeds and many controllers will allow you to have 10 micro steps per  full step  This system would give 1 2000 of a revolution as the minimum step which is fine     Next look at the possible rapid feed speed  Assume  conservatively  that the maximum  motor speed is 500 rpm  This would give a rapid of 50 inches minute or about 15 seconds  for the full slide travel  This would be satisfactory although not spectacular     At this speed the micro stepping motor drive electronics need 16 666  500   200   10   60   pulses per second  On a 1 GHz PC  Mach3 can generate 35 000 pulses per second  simultaneously on each of the six possible axes  So there are no problems here     You now have to choose the torque that the machine will require  One way to measure this  is to set up the machine for the heaviest cut you think you will ever make and  with a long  lever  say 12   on the slide handwheel  turn it at the end with a spring balance  of set of  spring kitchen scales   The torque for the cut  in ounce inches  is the balance reading  in  ounces  x 12  The other way is to use a motor size and specification that you know works  on someone else s machine with the same type of slide and screw     As the rapid feed speed was reasonable you could consider slowing it down by 2 1 gearing   perhaps b
198. ions like an LCD display  a tool changer  axis  clamps or a swarf conveyor can also be made through a ModBus device  e g  a PLC or  Homann Designs ModIO controller      Buttons can be interfaced by a  keyboard emulator  which generates pseudo key presses in  response to input signals     Mach3 will control all six axes  co ordinating their simultaneous movement with linear  interpolation or perform circular interpolation on two axes  out of X  Y or Z  while  simultaneously linearly interpolating the other four with the angle being swept by the  circular interpolation  The tool can thus move in a tapering helical path if required  The  feed rate during these moves is maintained at the value requested by your part program   subject to limitations of the acceleration and maximum speed of the axes  You can move the  axes by hand with various jogging controls     If the mechanism of your machine is like a robot arm or a hexapod then Mach3 will not be  able to control it because of the kinematic calculations that would be needed to relate the   tool  position in X  Y and Z coordinates to the length and rotation of the machine arms      Mach3 can switch the spindle on  rotating in either direction  and switch it off  It can also  control the rate at which it rotates  rpm  and monitor its angular position for operations like  cutting threads     Mach3 can turn the two types of coolant on and off     Mach3 will monitor the EStop and can take note of the operation of the reference swit
199. ir pin of the axis in Config gt Ports and Pins gt Output Pins tab  and Apply it  or  b   check the appropriate box in Config gt Motor Reversals for the axis that you are using  You  can akso  of course  just switch off and reverse one pair of physical connections to the  motor from the drive electronics     If a stepper motor hums or screams then you have wired it incorrectly or are trying to drive  it much too fast  The labelling of stepper wires  especially 8 wire motors  is sometimes very  confusing  You will need to refer to the motor and driver electronics documentation      Figure 5 11   Motor tuning dialog    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 13    If a servo motor runs away at full speed or flicks and indicates a fault on its driver then its  armature  or encoder  connections need reversing  see your servo electronics  documentation for more details   If you have any troubles here then you will be pleased if  you followed the advice to buy current and properly supported products   buy right  buy  once     Most drives will work well with a 1 microsecond minimum pulse width  If you have  problems with the test moves  e g  motor seems too noisy  first check that your step pulses  are not inverted  by Low active being set incorrectly for Step on the Output Pins tab of Ports  and Pins  then you might try increasing the pulse width to  say  5 microseconds  The Step  and Direction interface is very simple but  because it  sort of works  when configured  ba
200. iring the  production of another part program     Of the face of it  the problem should be easy to solve  All you need to do is to offset the  controlled point by an appropriate X and Y to allow for the tool radius  Simple trigonometry  gives the distances depending on the angle the direction of cut makes to the axes     In practice it is not quite so easy  There are several issues but the main one is that the  machine has to set a Z position before it starts cutting and at that time it does not know the  direction in which the tool is going to be moving  This problem is solved by providing  pre   entry moves  which take place in waste material of the part  These ensure that the  compensation calculations can be done before the actual part outline is being cut  Choice of  a path which runs smoothly into the part s outline also optimises the surface finish  An exit  move is sometimes used to maintain the finish at the end of a cut      Figure 9 1   Two possible toolpaths to cut triangle    G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  9 2    9 2  Two Kinds of Contour    Mach3 handles compensation for two types of contour         The contour given in the part program code is the edge of material that is not to be  machined away  We will call this type a  material edge contour   This is the sort  of code that might be  hand written         The contour given in the NC code is the tool path that would be followed by a tool  of exactly the correct radius  We will call thi
201. irst program  The parameter values will be saved when the first  program exits and restored when the second one starts up  Use G92 3 near the beginning of  the second program  That will restore the offsets saved in the first program     10 7 28 Set Feed Rate Mode   G93  G94 and G95  Three feed rate modes are recognized  inverse time  units per minute and units per  revolution of spindle  Program G93 to start the inverse time mode  this is very infrequently  employed   Program G94 to start the units per minute mode  Program G95 to start the units  per rev mode     In inverse time feed rate mode  an F word means the move should be completed in  one  divided by the F number  minutes  For example  if the F number is 2 0  the move should be  completed in half a minute     In units per minute feed rate mode  an F word on the line is interpreted to mean the  controlled point should move at a certain number of inches per minute  millimetres per  minute  or degrees per minute  depending upon what length units are being used and which  axis or axes are moving     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 32    In units per rev feed rate mode  an F word on the line is interpreted to mean the controlled  point should move at a certain number of inches per spindle revolution  millimetres per  spindle revolution  or degrees per spindle revolution  depending upon what length units are  being used and which axis or axes are moving     When the inverse time feed rate mode is 
202. is     The  TAP file is then loaded into Mach3 and you can run it as with any other part program     Full details of the conversion processes and their parameters are given in chapter 8       Figure 6 27 Choosing import filter    Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  7 1    7   Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    This chapter explains how Mach3 works out where exactly you mean when    you ask the tool to move to a given position  It describes the idea of a    coordinate system  defines the Machine Coordinate System and shows how  you can specify the lengths of each Tool  the position of a workpiece in a    Fixture and  if you need to  to add your own variable Offsets     You may find it heavy going on the first read  We suggest that you try out  the techniques using your own machine tool  It is not easy to do this just   desk  running Mach3 as you need to see where an actual tool is and you    will need to understand simple G code commands like G00 and G01     Mach3 can be used without a detailed understanding of this chapter but you  will find that using its concepts makes setting up jobs on your machine is    very much quicker and more reliable     7 1  Machine coordinate system    You have seen that most Mach3 screens have DROs labelled  X Axis    Y Axis  etc  If you  are going to make parts accurately and minimise the chance of your tool crashing into  anything you need to understand exactly what these values mean at all t
203. is word using G code from group 1 is implicitly in  effect on a line  by having been activated on an earlier line   and a group 0 G code that uses  axis words appears on the line  the activity of the group 1 G code is suspended for that line   The axis word using G codes from group 0 are G10  G28  G30  and G92     Mach3 displays the current mode at the top of each screen     10 7  G Codes    G codes of the Mach3 input language are shown in figure 10 4 and are the described in  detail     The descriptions contain command prototypes  set in courier type     In the command prototypes  the tilde     stand for a real value  As described earlier  a real  value may be  1  an explicit number  4 4  for example   2  an expression   2 2 4   for  example   3  a parameter value   88  for example  or  4  a unary function value  acos 0   for  example     In most cases  if axis words  any or all of X   Y   Z   A   B   C   U   V    W   are given  they specify a destination point  Axis numbers relate to the currently active  coordinate system  unless explicitly described as being in the absolute coordinate system   Where axis words are optional  any omitted axes will have their current value  Any items in    The modal Groups for G codes are       group 1    G00  G01  G02  G03  G38 2  G80  G81  G82  G84  G85   G86  G87  G88  G89  motion       group 2    G17  G18  G19  plane selection       group 3    G90  G91  distance mode       group 5    G93  G94  feed rate mode       group 6    G20  G21  un
204. its       group 7    G40  G41  G42  cutter radius compensation       group 8    G43  G49  tool length offset       group 10    G98  G99  return mode in canned cycles       group 12    G54  G55  G56  G57  G58  G59  G59 xxx  coordinate  system selection       group 13    G61  G61 1  G64  path control mode    The modal groups for M codes are       group 4    M0  M1  M2  M30  stopping      group 6    M6  tool change      group 7    M3  M4  M5  spindle turning      group 8    M7  M8  M9  coolant  special case  M7 and M8 may be  active at the same time       group 9    M48  M49  enable disable feed and speed override controls    In addition to the above modal groups  there is a group for non modal  G codes       group 0    G4  G10  G28  G30  G53  G92  G92 1  G92 2  G92 3     Figure 10 3   Modal groups     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 15    the command prototypes not explicitly described as optional are required  It is an error if a  required item is omitted     Summary of G codes    G0  Rapid positioning    G1  Linear interpolation    G2  Clockwise circular helical interpolation    G3  Counterclockwise circular Helical interpolation    G4  Dwell    G10  Coordinate system origin setting    G12  Clockwise circular pocket    G13  Counterclockwise circular pocket    G15 G16  Polar Coordinate moves in G0 and G1    G17  XY Plane select    G18  XZ plane select    G19  YZ plane select    G20 G21  Inch Millimetre unit    G28  Return home    G28 1  Reference axe
205. ive electronics can be intelligent and only allow motion away from a  switch when the limit is hit  This is safer than disabling the limits so a user can jog the  machine off its limits but does rely on having a sophisticated drive     On a small machine when you use the second method  it is still possible to use only 3 inputs  to Mach3 for a 3 axis mill  4 for a gantry  type machine   see Slaving  and only two  switches are required as one limit and  reference can share a switch     The keyboard emulator has a much slower  response time that the parallel port but is  satisfactory for limit switches on a machine  without highspeed feeds  For details of the  architecture see Mach3 Customisation  manual     4 6 2  The switches  There are several choices you need to make  when selecting switches       limit      limit  and Ref  0 volts     5 volts    to Mach2 input    470 ohm  resistor     Figure 4 7   Two NC contact switches give  logic OR     Figure 4 6   Limit switch   microswitch  mounted on the table is tripped by bed  of machine     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 9    If you are going to have two switches  sharing an input then they need to be  connected so the signal is a logic  1  if  either switch is operated  i e  the  logical OR function   This is easy with  mechanical switches  If they have  normally closed contacts and are wired  in series as shown in figure 4 7  then  they will give an Active Hi signal if  either
206. l features          A button for estimating the time that a part program will take to run on the actual  machine tool         The controls for overriding the feedrate selected in the part program         DROs which give the extent of movement of the tool in all axes for the loaded part  program         A screen that lets you set up information like where you want the Z axis to be put  to make X and Y moves safe from hitting clamps etc          A screen that lets you monitor the logic levels  zero and one  on all Mach3s inputs  and outputs      Figure 3 11 Toolpath from Spiral txt    Overview of Mach3 software    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  3 12    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 1    4   Hardware issues and connecting the machine tool    This chapter tells you about the hardware aspects of connections  Chapter 5    gives details of configuring Mach3 to use the connected items     If you have bought a machine that is already equipped to be run by Mach3  then you will probably not need to read this chapter  except out of general  interest   Your supplier will have given you some documentation on how to    connect the parts of your system together     Read this chapter to discover what Mach3 expects it is going to control and  how you can connect up standard components like stepper motor drivers and  micro switches  We will assume that you can understand simple schematic    circuit diagrams  if not  then now is the time to ge
207. l need to send 2000 pulses per revolution for a stepper axis  drive     Some servo drives require one pulse per quadrature count from the motor encoder  thus  giving 1200 steps per rev for a 300 CPR encoder  Others include electronic gearing where  you can multiply the input steps by an integer value and  sometimes  the divide the result by  another integer value  The multiplication of input steps can be very useful with Mach3 as  the speed of small servo motors with a high resolution encoder can be limited by the  maximum pulse rate which Mach3 can generate     5 5 1 4  Mach3 steps per unit  So now we can finally calculate   Mach3 steps per unit   Mach3 steps per rev x Motor revs per unit    Figure 5 11 shows the dialog for Config gt Motor Tuning  Click a button to select the axis  which you are configuring and enter the calculated value of Mach3 steps per unit in the box  above the Save button   This value does not have to be an integer so you can achieve as  much accuracy as you wish  To avoid forgetting later click Save Axis Settings now     Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 12    5 5 2  Setting the maximum motor speed  Still using the Config gt Motor Tuning dialog  as you move the Velocity slider you will see a  graph of velocity against time for a short imaginary move  The axis accelerates  maybe  runs at full speed and then decelerates  Set the velocity to maximum for now  Use the  Acceleration slider to alter the rate of acceleration deceleration  t
208. lementing pallet shuttle using macros     10 1 16 Path Control Modes  The machining system may be put into any one of two path control modes   1  exact stop  mode   2  constant velocity mode  In exact stop mode  the machine stops briefly at the end  of each programmed move  In constant velocity mode  sharp corners of the path may be  rounded slightly so that the feed rate may be kept up  These modes are to allow the user to  control the compromise involved in turning corners because a real machine has a finite  acceleration due to the inertia of its mechanism     Exact stop does what it says  The machine will come to rest at each change of direction and  the tool will therefore precisely follow the commanded path     Constant velocity will overlap acceleration in the new direction with deceleration in the  current one in order to keep the commanded feedrate  This implies a rounding of any corner  but faster and smoother cutting  This is particularly important in routing and plasma cutting     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 7    The lower the acceleration of the machine axes  the greater will be the radius of the rounded  corner     In Plasma mode  set on Configure Logic dialog  the system attempts to optimise corner  motion for plasma cutting by a proprietary algorithm     It is also possible to define an limiting angle so that changes in direction of more than this  angle will always be treated as Exact Stop even though Constant Velocity is select
209. ll  5    Emulated input signals                                      5 4  Encoder  controls for                                                 6 12  Encoder inputs  defining                                                        5 5  Engine frequency  choice of suitable value                                 5 2  defining                                                        5 2  Enhanced pulsing  processor requirement for                            5 22  EStop  lockout until reset                                          4 2  EStop button  function                                                        4 2  not involving software                                   4 2  Exact stop mode  G61   setting                                             10 24  purpose of explained                                   10 6  Excecution of words  order of                                                     10 36  Expressions  defined                                                     10 11    F    F word  feed rate                                           10 35  Fault finding  port addressing and connections                    5 9  Feed and speed override  controlled by M48 M49                            10 34  Feed Hold button                                               6 7  Feed rate  defined                                                       10 5  F word to set                                             10 35  inverse time   G93                                    10 31  units per 
210. losed for later installation  When you want to do the  installation you merely run the downloaded file  For example you could run Windows  Explorer  right click Start button   and double click on the downloaded file in the working  directory     3 1 2  Installing  You do not need a  machine tool  connected yet  If  you are just  starting it would be  better not to have  one connected   Note where the  cable or cables  from the machine  tool are plugged  into your PC   Switch off the PC   the machine tool  and its drives and  unplug the 25 pin  connector s  from  the back of the PC   Now switch the PC  back on     When you run the downloaded file you will be guided through the usual installation steps  for a Windows program such as accepting the license conditions and selecting the folder for     Figure 3 1     The installer screen    Overview of Mach3 software    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  3 2    Mach3  On the Setup Finished dialog you should ensure that Initialise System is checked  and click Finish  You will now be told to reboot before running any Mach3 software     The background image during installation is the standard Mach3Mill screen     do not worry  as Mach3Turn is also being installed     On the Setup Finished dialog you should ensure that Load Mach3 Driver and Install  English Wizards are checked and then click Finish  You will now be told to reboot before  running any Mach3 software     3 1 3  The vital re boot  This reboot is vital  If you do not do it then y
211. m the finished cut before the entry  move is made     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 4    10  Mach 2 G  and M code language reference    This section defines the language  G codes etc   that are understood and    interpreted by Mach3     Certain functionality which was defined for machines in the NIST NMC   Next Generation Controller  architecture but is not presently implemented    my Mach3 is given in grey type in this chapter  If this functionality is    important for your application then please let ArtSoft Corporation know your    needs and they will be included in our development planning cycle     10 1  Some definitions    10 1 1 Linear Axes  The X  Y  and Z axes form a standard right handed coordinate system of orthogonal linear  axes  Positions of the three linear motion mechanisms are expressed using coordinates on  these axes     10 1 2 Rotational Axes  The rotational axes are measured in degrees as wrapped linear axes in which the direction  of positive rotation is counterclockwise when viewed from the positive end of the  corresponding X  Y  or Z axis  By  wrapped linear axis   we mean one on which the  angular position increases without limit  goes towards plus infinity  as the axis turns  counterclockwise and decreases without limit  goes towards minus infinity  as the axis turns  clockwise  Wrapped linear axes are used regardless of whether or not there is a mechanical  limit on rotation     Clockwise or counterclockwise is from the
212. minute   G94                              10 31  units per rev                                                  6 6  units per rev   G95                                    10 31  Feed rate units per rev   G95                         10 31  Feedrate  display DROs  described                                                  6 6  Feedrate control family  described                                                      6 5  Filed subroutine call  M98                                                          10 34  Fixture coordinate select  G54 G59 defined                                      10 24  Fixture coordinate systems   setting   G10     10 18  Flood coolant                                                  4 13    G    G00   rapid linear motion                              10 16  G01   linear feed rate move                           10 16  G02   clockwise arc                                       10 17  G03   counterclockwise arc                           10 17  G04   dwell                                                   10 18  units of P word in                                        5 24  G10   set coordinate systems                         10 18  G12   circular pocket                                     10 19  G13   circular pocket                                     10 19  G15   exit Polar mode                                   10 19  G16   enter Polar mode                                 10 19  G17   select XY plane                                   10 20  G18   select
213. n one machine and they require different values for  the motor tuning  or have different limit and home switch arrangements     You can either run Mach3 exe and choose from the list of available profiles or you can set  up extra shortcuts that specify the profile to use     In a shortcut  the profile to load is given in the   p  argument in the Target of the shortcut  properties  As an example you should inspect the Properties of the Mach3Mill shortcut   This can be done  for example  by right clicking the shortcut and choosing Properties from  the menu     Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 25    An  XML file for a profile can be edited by an external editor but you are very strongly  advised not to do this unless you are fully conversant with the meaning of each entry in the  files as some users have encountered very strange effects with mis formatted files  Notice  that some tags  e g  the screen layout  are only created when a built in default value is  overridden using Mach3 menus  It is much safer to use Mach3 s configuration menus to  update the XML profiles     When a new profile is created then a folder for storing its macros will be created  If you are     cloning    from a profile with custom macros then you must take care to copy any such  custom macros into the new profile     Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 1    6   Mach3 controls and running a part program    This chapter is intended for reference t
214. n output 5000 different speeds  Moving to 10Hz reduces  this to 2500 different speeds but this still amounts to a resolution of one or two RPM     A low frequency of square wave increases the time that it will take for the motor drive to  notice that a speed change has been requested  Between 5 and 10 Hz gives a good  compromise  The chosen frequency is entered in the PWMBase Freq box     Many drives and motors have a minimum speed  Typically because the cooling fan is very  inefficient at low speeds whereas high torque and current might still be demanded  The  Minimum PWM   box allows you to set the percentage of maximum speed at which Mach3  will stop outputting the PWM signal     You should be aware that the PWM drive electronics may also have a minimum speed  setting and that Mach3 pulley configuration  see section x x  allows you to set minimum  speeds  Typically you should aim to set the pulley limit slightly higher than the Minimum  PWM   or hardware limit as this will clip the speed and or give a sensible error message  rather than just stopping it     Step and Direction motor    This may be an variable speed drive controlled by step pulses or a full servo drive     You can use the Mach3 pulley configuration  see section 5 5 6 1  to define a minimum  speed if this is needed by the motor or its electronics     5 3 6 4  Modbus spindle control  This block allows the setup of an analogue port on a Modbus device  e g  a Homann  ModIO  to control spindle speed  For details 
215. n would be touching the table at the corner of the paper     We have described using work offset number 1  You can use any numbers from 1 to 255   Only one is in use at any time and this can be chosen by the DRO on the Offsets screen or  by using G codes  G54 to G59 P253  in your part program     The final way of setting a work offset is by typing a new value into an axis DRO  The  current work offset will be updated so the controlled point is referred to by the value now in  the axis DRO  Notice that the machine does not move  it is merely that the origin of  coordinate system has been changed  The Zero X  Zero Y etc  buttons are equivalent to  typing 0 into the corresponding axis DRO     You are advised not to use this final method until you are confident using work offsets that  have been set up using the Offsets screen     So  to recap the example  by offsetting the Current Coordinate system by a work offset we  can draw the square at the right place on the paper wherever we have taped it down to the  table     7 2 2  Home in a practical machine  As mentioned above  although it looks tidy at first sight  it is often not a good idea to have  the Home Z position at the surface of the table  Mach3 has a button to Reference all the  axes  or you can Reference them individually   For an actual machine which has home  switches installed  this will move each linear axes  or chosen axis  until its switch is  operated then move slightly off it  The absolute machine coordinate syst
216. nally  counterclockwise   the Flood and Mist coolant pumps or valves and for control by your own  customized Mach3 buttons or macros     The Charge Pump line should be enabled and defined if your breakout board accept this  pulse input to continually confirm correct operation of Mach3  Charge Pump2 is used if  you have a second breakout board connected to the second port or want to verify the  operation of the second port itself     Click the Apply button to save the data on this tab     5 3 5 Defining encoder inputs  The Encoder MPGs tab is used to define the connections and the resolution of linear  encoders or Manual Pulse Generators  MPGs  used for jogging the axes      The Encoder MPGs tab is used to define the connections and the resolution of linear  encoders or Manual Pulse Generators  MPGs  used for jogging the axes  It is covered here  for completeness of the description of Config gt Ports  amp  Pins     This dialog does not need an active lo column as  if the encoders count the wrong way it is  merely necessary to swap the pins allocated for A and B inputs     5 3 5 1  Encoders  The Counts per unit value should be set to correspond to the resolution of the encoder  Thus  a linear scale with rulings at 20 microns produces a count every 5 microns  remember the  quadrature signal   that is 200 counts per unit  millimetre   If you have Native units set as  inches the it would be 200 x 25 4   5080 counts per unit  inch   The Velocity value is not  used      Figure 5 7  
217. nfigured  i e  what you are doing now  you define up to  4 available pulley combinations  These are set by the physical sizes of the pulleys or ratios  in the geared head  Then when a part program is being run the operator defines which  pulley  1 to 4  is in use     The machine s pulley ratios are set on the Config gt Ports and Pins dialog  figure 5 6  where  the maximum speed of the four pulley sets is defined together with the default one to be  used  The maximum speed is the speed at which the spindle will rotate when the motor is at  full speed  Full speed is achieved by 100  pulse width in PWM and at the set Vel value on  Motor Tuning  spindle Axis  for Step and Direction     As an example  suppose the position we will call  Pulley 1  is a step down of 5 1 from  motor to spindle and the maximum speed of the motor is 3600 rpm  Pulley 1 maximum  speed on Config gt Logic will be set to 720 rpm  3600    5   Pulley 4 might be a step up of  4 1  With the same motor speed its maximum speed would be set to 14 400 rpm  3600 x 4    The other pulleys would be intermediate ratios  The pulleys do not need to be defined in  increasing speeds but the numbers should relate in some logical way to the controls on the  machine tool     The Minimum Speed value applies equally to all pulleys and is expressed as a percentage of  the maximum speed and is  of course  also the minimum percentage PWM signal ratio  If a  speed lower than this is requested  by the S word etc   then Mach3 will requ
218. ng  it cannot overcome problems with the  machine in continuous cutting     The Config gt Backlash dialog allows you to  give an estimate of the distance which the  axis must back up by to ensure the backlash is  taken up when the final  forward  movement  is made  The speed at which this movement is  to be made is also specified  See figure 5 18    Note   a  These settings are only used when  backlash compensation is enabled by the  checkbox      b  Backlash compensation is a  last resort   when the mechanical design of your machine     Figure 5 18   Backlash configuration     Figure 5 17    Hotkeys and OEM trigger configuration    Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 20    cannot be improved  Using it will generally disable the    constant velocity    features ar     corners         c  Mach3 is not able to fully honour the axis acceleration parameters when compensating  for backlash so stepper systems will generally have to be detuned to avoid risk of lost steps     5 6 4  Configure Slaving  Large machines such as gantry routers or mills often need two drives  one on each side of  the gantry itself  If these become out of step then the gantry will  rack  and its cross axis  not be perpendicular to the long axis     You can use Config gt Slaving to configure Mach3 so one drive  say the X axis  is the main  drive and can slave another to it  perhaps the C axis configured as linear rather than rotary    See figure 5 19    During normal use the same number of st
219. nting but the other  output pins are little used and may be less powerful in a carefully  optimised  design  A  good isolating breakout board  see next section  will protect you from these electrical  compatibility problems     4 4 3  Electrical noise and expensive smoke    Even if you skipped the previous  section you had better read this one     You will see that pins 18 to 25 are  connected to the 0 volt side of the  computer s power supply  All signals  inside and outside the PC are relative to  this  If you connect many long wires to it  especially if they run near wires carrying high  currents to motors  then these wires will have currents flowing in then that create voltages  which are like noise and can cause errors  You might can even crash the computer     The axis and perhaps spindle drives  which you will connect to Mach3 through your parallel  port  are likely to work at between 30 and 240 volts and they will be able to supply currents  of many amps  Properly connected they will do no harm to the computer but an accidental     Figure 4 2     Three examples of commercially  available breakout boards     Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 5    short circuit could easily destroy the entire computer mother board and even the CD ROM  and hard drives as well     For these two reasons you are very strongly advised to buy a device called an  isolating  breakout board   This will provide you with terminals that are easy to 
220. ny fixture                                 10 24  G61   set exact stop mode                              10 24  G64   set constant velocity mode                   10 24  G68     rotate coordinate system                      10 24  G69     clear rotation                                       10 24  G70   inch units   setting                               10 24  G71   millimetre units   setting                      10 24  G73  pullback DRO                                           10 25  G73     high speed peck drilling canned cycle 10 25  G80   cancel modal motion                            10 25  G81   drilling canned cycle                            10 26  G82   drilling with dwell canned cycle           10 27  G83   peck drilling canned cycle                    10 27  G84   tapping canned cycle                            10 28  G85   boring and reaming canned cycle         10 28  G86   boring with dwell canned cycle            10 28  G87   back boring canned cycle                     10 29  G88   boring manual retract canned cycle     10 30  G89   boring with dwell and retract canned cycle                                                                   10 30  G90   absolute distance mode                        10 30  G91   incremental distance mode                   10 30  G92   workpiece offsets  interaction with parameters                       10 31  G92 offsets                                                    10 31  G92 offsets   introduction                        
221. o explain the screen controls provided  by Mach3 for setting up and running a job on the machine  It is of relevance  to machine operators and for part programmers who are going to prove their    programs on Mach3     6 1  Introduction    This chapter covers a lot of detail  You may wish to skim section 6 2 and then look at the  sections for inputting and editing part programs before returning to the details of all the  screen controls     6 2  How the controls are explained in this chapter    Although at first sight you may feel daunted by the range of options and data displayed by  Mach3  this is actually organised into a few logical groups  We refer to these as Families of  Controls  By way of explanation of the term  control   this covers both buttons and their  associated keyboard shortcuts used to operate Mach3 and the information displayed by  DROs  digital read outs   labels or LEDs  light emitting diodes      The elements of each control family are defined for reference in this chapter  The families  are explained in order of importance for most users     You should  however  note that the actual screens of your Mach3 does not include every  control of a family when the family is used  This may be to increase readability of a    particular screen or to avoid accidental changes to the part being machined in a production  environment    A Screen Designer is provided that allows controls to be removed or added from the screens  of a set of screens  You can modify or des
222. o join one or both of the online discussion fora for Mach3  Links  to join it are at www machsupport com You should be aware that  while these fora have  many engineers with a vast range of experience as participants  they do not constitute a  substitute for a machine tool manufacturer s support network  If your application requires  this level of support then you should buy the system from a local distributor or an OEM  with a distributor network  In that way you will get the benefits of Mach3 with the  possibility of on site support     Certain portions of text in this manual are printed  greyed out   They generally describe  features found in machine controllers but which are not presently implemented in Mach3   The description of a greyed out feature here is not to be taken as a commitment to  implement it at any given time in the future     Thanks are due to numerous people including the original team who worked at National  Institute for Standards and Testing  NIST  on the EMC project and the users of Mach3  without whose experience  materials and constructive comments this manual could not have  been written  Credits are given for individual utilities and features as these are described in  the body of the manual     ArtSoft Corporation is dedicated to continual improvement of its products  so suggestions  for enhancements  corrections and clarifications will be gratefully received     Art Fenerty and John Prentice assert their right to be identified as the authors of 
223. o use this feature but its Step and Direction outputs can be  configured to a non existent pin  for example Pin 0  Port 0     Shuttle Accel controls the responsiveness of Mach3 to the MPG when it is being used to  control the execution of lines of GCode     Lookahead determines the number of lines of GCode that the interpreter can buffer for  execution  It does not normally require tuning     Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 23    Jog Increments in Cycle Mode  The Cycle Jog Step button will load the values in the list  into the Step DRO in turn  This is often more convenient than typing into the Step DRO   Code the special value 999 to switch to Cont Jog Mode     Reference Switch Loc  These values define the machine coordinate position to be set on  referencing  after hitting the Home switch  if provided  for each axis  The values are  absolute positions in the setup units     5 6 7  Configure other Logic items  The functions of the Config gt Logic dialog  figure 5 22  are described below     G20 G21 Control  If Lock DROs to set up units is checked then even though G20 and  G21 will alter the way X  Y  Z etc  words are interpreted  inch or millimetre  the DROs will  always display in the Setup Unit system     Tool change  An M6 tool change request can be ignored or used to call the M6 macros   q v    If Auto Tool Changer is checked then the M6Start M6End macros will be called but  Cycle Start does not need to be pressed at any stage     Angular properties 
224. ode  IJK  numbers usually represent increments from the current controlled point     Incorrect settings of this mode will generally result in large incorrectly oriented arcs in the  toolpath display     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 31    10 7 27 G92 Offsets   G92  G92 1  G92 2  G92 3  See the chapter on coordinate systems for full details  You are strongly advised not to use  this legacy feature on any axis where there is another offset applied     To make the current point have the coordinates you want  without motion   program  G92 X  Y  Z  A  B  C    where the axis words contain the axis numbers you want   All axis words are optional  except that at least one must be used  If an axis word is not  used for a given axis  the coordinate on that axis of the current point is not changed  It is an  error if         all axis words are omitted     G52 and G92 use common internal mechanisms in Mach3 and may not be used together     When G92 is executed  the origin of the currently active coordinate system moves  To do  this  origin offsets are calculated so that the coordinates of the current point with respect to  the moved origin are as specified on the line containing the G92  In addition  parameters  5211 to 5216 are set to the X  Y  Z  A  B  and C axis offsets  The offset for an axis is the  amount the origin must be moved so that the coordinate of the controlled point on the axis  has the specified value     Here is an example  Suppose the curren
225. of the feed rate is as follows  unless inverse time feed rate  G93  mode is being used          For motion involving one or more of the linear axes  X  Y  Z and optionally A  B   C   without simultaneous rotational axis motion  the feed rate means length units per  minute along the programmed linear XYZ ABC  path         For motion involving one or more of the linear axes  X  Y  Z and optionally A  B   C   with simultaneous rotational axis motion  the feed rate means length units per  minute along the programmed linear XYZ ABC  path combined with the angular  velocity of the rotary axes multiplied by the appropriate axis Correction Diameter  multiplied by pi       3 14152      i e  the declared  circumference  of the part         For motion of one rotational axis with X  Y  and Z axes not moving  the feed rate  means degrees per minute rotation of the rotational axis          For motion of two or three rotational axes with X  Y  and Z axes not moving  the  rate is applied as follows  Let dA  dB  and dC be the angles in degrees through which  the A  B  and C axes  respectively  must move  Let D   sqrt  dA2   dB2   dC2    Conceptually  D is a measure of total angular motion  using the usual Euclidean metric   Let T be the amount of time required to move through D degrees at the current feed rate  in degrees per minute  The rotational axes should be moved in co ordinated linear  motion so that the elapsed time from the start to the end of the motion is T plus any  time required 
226. oing clockwise around the triangle  Notice that the coordinates of the triangle of  material appear in the NC code  Notice also that the tool path includes three arcs which are  not explicitly programmed  they are generated automatically     9 2 2  Tool Path Contour  When the contour is a tool path contour  the path is described in the part program  It is  expected that  except for during the entry moves  the path is intended to create some part  geometry  The path may be generated manually or by a CAD CAM program  considering  the part geometry which is intended to be made  For Mach3 to work  the tool path must be  such that the tool stays in contact with the edge of the part geometry  as shown on the left  side of figure 10 1  If a path of the sort shown on the right of figure 10 1 is used  in which  the tool does not stay in contact with the part geometry all the time  the interpreter will not  be able to compensate properly when undersized tools are used     For a tool path contour  the value for the cutter diameter in the tool table will be a small  positive number if the selected tool is slightly oversized and will be a small negative  number if the tool is slightly undersized  As implemented  if a cutter diameter value is  negative  the interpreter compensates on the other side of the contour from the one  programmed and uses the absolute value of the given diameter  If the actual tool is the  correct size  the value in the table should be zero     Tool Path Contour ex
227. oing if you  wish to avoid crashes on  your machine     6 2 11 1 Work Offsets  Mach3 by default uses  Work Offset number 1   Choosing any value from  1 to 255  and entering it  in the Current Work  Offset DRO  will make  that Work Offset current   Work offsets are  sometimes called Fixture  Offsets      Figure 6 11     Toolpath in relation to table     Figure 6 12     Work offsets family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 10    Typing into the DRO is equivalent to a part program issuing G55 to 59 or G58 1 to G59 253   q v       You can also set the current offset system using the Fixture buttons     You can change the value of the offset values for the current offset system by typing into  the relevant Part Offset DROs   Part Offset is yet another name for Work and Fixture  offsets      Values can also be set in these DROs by moving the axes to a desired place and clicking as  Set or Select button  The X and Y axes and Z axis are set in slightly different ways  Z is  easier to understand so we will describe it first     The Z offset will usually be set up with a    master tool    in the spindle  The Z for other tools  will then be corrected by the tool table  A gage block or sometimes even a piece of foil or  paper is slid between the tool and the top of the work  if this is to be Z   0 0  or the table  if  this is to be Z   0 0   The Z axis is very gently jogged down until the gage is just trapped by  the tool  The thickness of th
228. olant is turned off  like M9    No more lines of code in the file will be executed after the M2 or M30 command is  executed  Pressing cycle start will resume the program  M2  or start the program back at the  beginning of the file  M30      10 8 2 Spindle Control   M3  M4  M5  To start the spindle turning clockwise at the currently programmed speed  program M3     To start the spindle turning counterclockwise at the currently programmed speed  program  M4     For a PWM or Step Dir spindle the speed is programmed by the S word  For an on off  spindle control it will be set by the gearing pulleys on the machine     To stop the spindle from turning  program M5     It is OK to use M3 or M4 if the spindle speed is set to zero  If this is done  or if the speed  override switch is enabled and set to zero   the spindle will not start turning  If  later  the  spindle speed is set above zero  or the override switch is turned up   the spindle will start  turning  It is permitted to use M3 or M4 when the spindle is already turning or to use M5  when the spindle is already stopped but see the discussion on safety interlocks in  configuration for the implications of a sequence which would reverse an already running  spindle     10 8 3 Tool change   M6  Provided tool change requests are not to be ignored  as defined in Configure gt Logic    Mach3 will call a macro  q v  M6Start when the command is encountered  It will then wait  for Cycle Start to be pressed  execute the macro M6End and con
229. omputer Aided  Manufacturing  CAD CAM  program or programs on a computer  1   The output of this  program  which is a part program and is often in  G code  is transferred  by a network or  perhaps floppy disc   2  to the Machine Controller  3   The Machine Controller is  responsible for interpreting the part program to control the tool which will cut the  workpiece  The axes of the Machine  5  are moved by screws  racks or belts which are  powered by servo motors or stepper motors  The signals from the Machine Controller are  amplified by the Drives  4  so that they are powerful enough and suitably timed to operate  the motors     Although a milling machine is illustrated  the Machine can be a router or a plasma or laser  cutter  A separate manual describes Mach3 controlling a lathe  vertical borer etc     Frequently the Machine Controller can control starting and stopping of the spindle motor   or even control its speed   can turn coolant on and off and will check that a part program or  Machine Operator  6  are not trying to move any axis beyond its limits     The Machine Controller also has controls like buttons  a keyboard  potentiometer knobs  a  manual pulse generator  MPG  wheel  or a joystick so that the Operator can control the     Figure 1 1   Typical NC machining system    Introduction    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  2 2    machine manually and start and stop the running of the part program  The Machine  Controller has a display so that the Operator knows what is 
230. on on the Windows  Control Panel to configure the voice to be used  speed of speaking etc     G04 Dwell param in Milliseconds  if checked then the command G4 5000 will give a Dwell  in running of 5 seconds  If the control is unchecked it gives a dwell of 1 hour 23 minutes 20  seconds     Set charge pump to 5kHz for laser standby level  In this setting charge pump output or  output s  are a 5 kHz signal  for compatibility with some lasers  rather than the standard  12 5kHz signal     Use Safe_Z  If checked then Mach3 will make use of the Safe Z position defined     Note  If you use a machine without referencing as the initial operation then it is safer to  leave this option unchecked as without referencing the machine coordinate system is  arbitrary     Tool Selections Persistent  if checked  remembers the selected tool at shutdown of Mach3     5 7  How the Profile information is stored    When the Mach3 exe program is run it will prompt you for the Profile file to use  This will  generally be in the Mach3 folder and will have the extension  XML  You can view and print  the contents of Profile files with Internet Explorer  as XML is a mark up language used on  web pages     Shortcuts are set up by the system installer to run Mach3 exe with default Profiles for a Mill  and for Turning  i e  Mach3Mill and Mach3Turn   You can create your own shortcuts each  with a different Profile so one computer can control a variety of machine tools     This is very useful if you have more tha
231. ontrol the motor contactors for your machine     Although this sounds straightforward  in practice you need to be very careful  Unless you  really need to run the spindle  backwards  it would be better to treat M3 and M4 as the  same or to allow M4 to activate a signal which you do not connect to anything     Clearly it is possible  in an error situation  for the clockwise and counterclockwise signals to  be active together  This may cause the contactors to short the mains supply  Special  mechanically interlocked reversing contactors can be obtained and if you are going to allow  your spindle to run counterclockwise then you need to use one  Another difficulty is that the   G code  definition says that it is legal to issue an M4 when the spindle is running  clockwise under an M3  and vice versa   If your spindle drive is an AC motor  just  changing the direction when running at full speed is going to impose very large forces on  the mechanical drive of the machine and will probably blow the AC fuse or trip a circuit  breaker  For safety you need to introduce time delays on the operation of the contactors or  use a modern inverter drive which allows you to change direction with a running motor     See also the note about the limited number of Relay Activation Signals in the section on  Coolant     2  Step and Direction motor control    If your spindle motor is a servomotor with a step and direction drive  like the axis drives   then you can configure two output signals to con
232. opped the  spindle or coolant then you will generally want to turn them on before continuing  Mach3     Figure 6 7 Feed control family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 7    will however  remember the axis positions at the time of the FeedHold and return to them  before continuing the part program    6 2 7 3  Stop  Stop halts axis motion as quickly as possible  It may result in lost steps  especially on  stepper motor driven axes  and restarting may not be valid     6 2 7 4  Rewind  Rewinds the currently loaded part program     6 2 7 5  Single BLK  SingleBLK is a toggle  with indicator LED   In Single Block mode a Cycle Start will  execute the next single line of the part program and then enter FeedHold     6 2 7 6  Reverse Run  Reverse Run is a toggle  with indicator LED   It should be used after a Feed Hold or Single  Block and the next Cycle Start will cause the part program to run in reverse  This is  particularly useful in recovering from a lost arc condition in plasma cutting or a broken tool     6 2 7 7  Line Number  Line DRO is the ordinal number of the current line in the G code display window  starting  from 0   Note that this is not related to the  N word  line number     You can type into this DRO to set the current line     6 2 7 8  Run from here  Run from here performs a dummy run of the part program to establish what the modal state   G20 G21  G90 G91 etc   should be and then prompts for a move to put the controlled
233. or in MDI mode is to stop after each line of input   anyway     M code  Meaning    M0  Program stop    M1  Optional program stop    M2  Program end    M3 4  Rotate spindle clockwise counterclckwise    M5  Stop spindle rotation    M6  Tool change  by two macros     M7  Mist coolant on    M8  Flood coolant on    M9  All coolant off    M30  Program end and Rewind    M47  Repeat program from first line    M48  Enable speed and feed override    M49  Disable speed and feed override    M98  Call subroutine    M99  Return from subroutine repeat     Figure 10 7   Built in M codes     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 33    If a program is stopped by an M0  M1  pressing the cycle start button will restart the  program at the following line     To end a program  program M2 or M30  M2 leaves the next line to be executed as the M2  line  M30  rewinds  the G code file  These commands can have the following effects  depending on the options chosen on the Configure gt Logic dialog          Axis offsets are set to zero  like G92 2  and origin offsets are set to the default   like G54           Selected plane is set to XY  like G17           Distance mode is set to absolute  like G90           Feed rate mode is set to Units per minute mode  like G94           Feed and speed overrides are set to ON  like M48           Cutter compensation is turned off  like G40           The spindle is stopped  like M5           The current motion mode is set to G1  like G1           Co
234. ore any feed speed movements even if the F2 5 appears in the middle or even  at the end of the line  block   If in doubt about the order that will be used then type several  separate MDI commands in one by one     3 4 2  Teaching  Mach3 can remember a sequence of lines that you enter using MDI and write them to a file   This can then be run again and again as a G code program      Figure 3 4     MDI data being typed    Overview of Mach3 software    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  3 8    On the MDI screen  click the Start Teach button  The LED next to it will light to remind  you that you are  teaching  Type in a series  of MDI lines  Mach3 will  execute them as you  press return after each  line and store them in a  conventionally named  Teach file  When you  have finished  click Stop  Teach     You can type your own  code or try     g21  f100  g1 x10 y0  g1 x10 y5  x0  y0  All the 0 are zeros in this   Next click Load Edit and  go to the Program Run  screen  You will see the  lines you have typed are  displayed in the G code window  figure 3 6   If you click Cycle Start then Mach3 will  execute your program     When you have used the editor then you will be able to correct any mistakes and save the  program in a file of your own choosing     3 5  Wizards     CAM without a dedicated CAM software    Mach3 allows the use of add   on screens which allow the  automation of quite complex  tasks by prompting the user  to provide the relevant  information  In this sense  they are rath
235. ort and its history  When IBM designed the original PC  160k floppy disc drive  64kbytes of RAM   they  provided an interface for  connecting printers using a  25 conductor cable  This is  the foundation of the  Parallel port we have on  most PCs today  As it is a  very simple way of  transferring data it has been  used for many things other  than connecting printers   You can transfer files  between PC  attach copy  protection  dongles    connect peripherals like  scanners and Zip drives and of course control machine tools using it  USB is taking over  many of these functions and this conveniently leaves the parallel port free for Mach3     The connector on the PC is a 25 way female  D  connector  Its sockets seen from the back  of the PC are shown in figure 4 1  The arrows give the direction of information flow relative  to the PC  Thus  for example  pin 15 is an input to the PC     Note  Convertors which plug into a USB port and have a 25 pin connector will not drive a  machine even though they are perfectly suitable for the simpler task of connecting a printer     4 4 2  Logic signals  On first reading  you may wish to skip to the next heading and return here if you have to get  involved with the nitty gritty of interface circuits  It will probably be useful to read it with  the documentation for your axis drive electronics     All the signals output by Mach3 and input to it are binary digital  i e  zeros and ones  These  signals are voltages supplied by the output pins o
236. other programs  which you probably are not even aware are on your system that can do the same  Windows  can and does start many processes in the background  some appear as icons in the system  tray  bottom right of screen  and others do not show themselves in any way  Other possible  sources of erratic operation are local area network connections which may be configured to  automatically speed detect  You should configure these to the actual speed 10 Mbps or 100  Mbps of your network  Finally a machine that has been surfing the Internet may have  gained one or more of a host of  robot  type programs which spy on what you are doing and  send data over the  net to their originators  This traffic can interfere with Mach3 and is not  something you want anyway  Use a search engine for terms like  Spybot  to locate software  to tidy up your machine     Because of these factors  it is important  though not mandatory  that you test your system  when you suspect something is wrong or you just want to check that an install went well     Double click the DriverTest icon that you set up  Its screen shot is in figure 3 2     You can ignore all the boxes with the exception of the Pulse Frequency  It should be fairly  steady around 25 000 Hz but yours may vary  even quite wildly  This is because Mach3  uses the Windows clock to calibrate its pulse timer and  over a short time scale  the  Windows clock can be affected by other processes loading the computer  So you may  actually be using an 
237. ou all  sorts of positioning  problems     6 2 16 Encoder control family  This family displays the values from the axis encoders and allows them to be transferred to  and from the main axis DROs    The Zero button will reset the corresponding encoder DRO to zero     The To DRO button copies the value into the main axis DRO  i e  applies this values as a  G92 offset      The Load DRO button loads the encoder DRO from the corresponding main axis DRO     6 2 17 Automatic Z control family  Mach3 has the  facility to set a lower  limit for moves in the  Z axis  See  Config gt Logic dialog  for the static setting  of this Inhibit Z  value     There is also a control family which allows this Inhibit Z value to be set while preparing  and before running a G code program  This is shown in figure 6 19     Code the program  which might often be a DXF or HPGL import  so that it makes a single  cut or set of cuts at the finally desired Z depth  perhaps Z    0 6 inch assuming top of  workpiece is Z   0   The last command should be an M30  Rewind      Figure 6 18   Encoder control family    Figure 6 19     Automatic Z control    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 13    Using the Automatic Z Control controls  a  set the Z inhibit value to the Z for depth for the  first roughing cut  perhaps Z   0 05   b  the Lower Z Inhibit to the successive cut depths   we might allow 0 1 as the tool has some side support   The whole job will need seven  passes to g
238. ou will get into great difficulties which can  only be overcome by using the Windows Control Panel to uninstall the driver manually  So  please reboot now     If you are interested in knowing why the reboot is required then read on  otherwise skip to  the next section     Although Mach3 will appear to be a single program when you are using it  it actually  consists of two parts  a driver which is installed as part of Windows like a printer or  network driver and a graphical user interface  GUI      The driver is the most important and ingenious part  Mach3 must be able to send very  accurately timed signals to control the axes of the machine tool  Windows likes to be in  charge and runs normal user programs when it has nothing better to do itself  So Mach3  cannot be a  normal user program   it must be at the lowest level inside Windows  that is it  handles interrupts   Furthermore  to do this at the high speeds possibly required  each axis  can be given attention 45 000 times per second   the driver needs to tune its own code   Windows does not approve of this  it s a trick that viruses play  so it has to be asked to give  special permission  This process requires the reboot  So if you have not done the re boot  then Windows will give the Blue Screen of Death and the driver will be corrupt  The only  way out of this will be to manually remove the driver     Having given these dire warnings  it is only fair to say that the reboot is only required when  the driver is first ins
239. over time  Other parameters will be undefined when Mach3 is loaded  The parameters are  preserved when the interpreter is reset  The parameters with meanings defined by Mach3  are given in figure 10 1    Parameter  number  Meaning  Parameter  number  Meaning    5161  5162  5163  5164  5165  5166  5181  5182  5183  5184  5185  5186  5191  5192  5193  5194  5195  5196  5211  5212  5213  5214  5215  5216  5220  5221  5222  5223  5224  5225  5226  5241  5242  5243  5244  5245  5246    G28 home X  G28 home Y  G28 home Z  G28 home A  G28 home B  G28 home C  G30 home X  G30 home Y  G30 home Z  G30 home A  G30 home B  G30 home C  Scale X  Scale Y  Scale Z  Scale A  Scale B  Scale C  G92 offset X  G92 offset Y  G92 offset Z  G92 offset A  G92 offset B  G92 offset C  Current Work offset  number  Work offset 1 X  Work offset 1 Y  Work offset 1 Z  Work offset 1 A  Work offset 1 B  Work offset 1 C  Work offset 2 X  Work offset 2 Y  Work offset 2 Z  Work offset 2 A  Work offset 2 B  Work offset 2 C    5261  5262  5263  5264  5265  5266  5281  5282  5283  5284  5285  5286  5301  5302  5303  5304  5305  5306  5321  5322  5323  5324  5325  5326  10281  10282  10283  10284  10285  10286  10301  10302  10303  10304  10305  10306    Work offset 3 X  Work offset 3 Y  Work offset 3 Z  Work offset 3 A  Work offset 3 B  Work offset 3 C  Work offset 4 X  Work offset 4 Y  Work offset 4 Z  Work offset 4 A  Work offset 4 B  Work offset 4 C  Work offset 5 X  Work offset 5 Y  Work offset 5 Z  Work offset 
240. pen sticks 2 7   out of the holder  Then you click the Touch button by the Z offset  This would load the   2 7   into the Z offset of Tool  1  Clicking the Offset On Off toggle would light the  LED and apply the tool offset and so the Z axis DRO will read 0 0 You could draw the  square by running the example part program as before     2  Next to use the red pen you would jog the Z axis up  say to Z   5 0 again  to take out  the blue pen and put in the red  Physically swapping the pens obviously does not alter  the axis DROs  Now you would  switch Off the tool offset LED  select Tool  2   jog  and Touch at the corner of the paper  This would set up tool 2 s Z offset to 3 2    Switching On the offset for Tool  2 again will display Z   0 0 on the axis DRO so the  part program would draw the red square  over the blue one      3  Now that tools 1 and 2 are set up you can change them as often as you wish and get the  correct Current Coordinate system by selecting the appropriate tool number and  switching its offsets on  This tool selection and switching on and off of the offsets can  be done in the part program  T word  M6  G43 and G49  and there are DROs on the  standard Program Run screen     7 3 2  Non presettable tools  Some tool holders do not have a way of refitting a given tool in exactly the same place each  time  For example the collet of a router is usually bored too deep to bottom the tool  In this  case it may still be worth setting up the tool offset  say with tool  1
241. persistent between runs in the same way as Work Offset data     6 2 11 3 Direct access to Offset Tables  The tables can be opened and edited directly  using the Save Work Offsets and Save Tool  Offsets buttons or the Operator gt Fixtures  i e   Work Offsets  and Operator gt Tooltable menus     6 2 12 Rotational Diameter control  family  As described in the Feedrate control family  it is  possible to define the approximate size of a     Figure 6 14   Rotational diameters     Figure 6 13     Tool Offset    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 11    rotated workpiece so the rotational axis speed can be correctly included in the blended  feedrate  The relevant diameters are entered in the DROs of this family     The Axis control Family has warning LED s  to indicated the setting of non zero values  here     Values are not required if rotary movement is not to be coordinated with linear axes  In this  case a suitable F word for degrees per minute or degrees per rev should be programmed     6 2 13 Tangential control family  On a machine to cut vinyl or fabric it is very useful to  use a rotary axis to control the direction that the knife  points  It will cut best if tangential to the direction in  which the X and Y axes are moving at any time     Mach3 will control the A axis like this for G1 moves   Clearly the point of the knife should be as near to the  axis about which a turns and this axis must be parallel  to the Z axis of the machine  
242. pin on the Output Signals  Selection Page tab  figure 5 6  for the Spindle Step  This pin must be connected to your  PWM motor control electronics  You do not need one for Spindle Direction so set this pin  to 0  Apply the changes     Define External Activation signals in Ports and Pins and Configure gt Output Devices to  switch the PWM controller on off and  if required  to set the direction of rotation     Now move to the Configure gt Ports  amp  Pins Spindle Options and locate the PWMBase Freq  box  The value in here is the frequency of the squarewave whose pulse width is modulated   This is the signal which appears on the Spindle Step pin  The higher the frequency you  choose here the faster your controller will be able to respond to speed changes but the lower  the  resolution  of chosen speeds  The number of different speeds is the Engine pulse  frequency    PWMBase freq  Thus for example if you are running at 35 000 Hz and  set the PWMBase to 50 Hz there are 700 discrete speeds available  This is almost  certainly sufficient on any real system as a motor with maximum speed of 3600 rpm  could  theoretically  be controlled in steps of less than 6 rpm     5 5 6 3  Step and Direction spindle controller  To configure the spindle motor for Step and Direction control  check the Spindle Axis  Enabled boxes on the Port and Pins  Printer Port and Axis Selection Page tab  figure 5 1    Leave PWM Control unchecked  Don t forget to Apply the changes  Define output pins on  the Outp
243. probably produce a disastrous crash     6 2 6 3  Feed display  The actual feed in operation allowing for the co ordinated motion of all axes is displayed in  Units min and Units rev  If the spindle speed is not set and the actual spindle speed is not  measured then the Feed per rev value will be meaningless     6 2 6 4  Feed override  Unless M49  Disable feedrate override  is in use  the feedrate can be manually overridden   in the range 20  to 299   by entering a percentage in the DRO  This value can be nudged   in steps of 10   with the buttons or their keyboard shortcuts and be reset to 100   The  LED warns of an override is in operation     The FRO DRO displays the calculated result of applying the percentage override to the set  feedrate     6 2 7  Program Running control family  These controls handle the execution of a loaded part program or the commands on an MDI  line     6 2 7 1  Cycle Start  Safety warning  Note that the Cycle Start button will  in general  start the spindle and axis  movement  It should always be configured to require  two hand  operation and if you are  assigning your own hotkeys it should not be a single keystroke     6 2 7 2  FeedHold  The Feedhold button will stop the execution of the part program as quickly as possible but  in a controlled way so it can be restarted by Cycle Start  The spindle and coolant will  remain on but can be stopped manually if required     When in FeedHold you can jog the axes  replace a broken tool etc  If you have st
244. r offset them so that the bottom leftmost point  is 0 0   c  optionally insert codes to control the arc beam on a plasma laser cutter and  d   make the plane of the drawing be interpreted as Z X for turning operations     The DXF import is in the file menu  The dialog in figure 8 1 is displayed      Figure 8 1   DXF import dialog    DXF  HPGL and image file import    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  8 2    8 2 1  File loading  This shows the four stages of importing the file  Step 1 is to load the DXF file  Clicking the  Load File button displays an open file dialog for this  Figure 8 2 shows a file with two  rectangles and a circle     8 2 2  Defining action for layers  The next stage is to define how the lines on each layer of the drawing are to be treated   Click the Layer Control button to display the dialog shown in figure 8 3     Turn on the layer or layers which have lines on them that you want to cut  choose the tool to  use  the depth of cut  the feedrate to use  the plunge rate  the spindle speed  only used if you  have a step direction or PWM spindle controller  and the order in which you want the layers  cutting  Notice that the  Depth of cut  value is the Z value to be used in the cut so  if the     Figure 8 2   a drawing of eight lines and one circle     Figure 8 3   Options for each layer    DXF  HPGL and image file import    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  8 3    surface of the work is Z   0  will be a negative value  The order may be important for issues  like cut
245. r supplied to the input pins of the parallel  port  These voltages are measured relative to the computer s 0 volt line  which is connected  to pins 18 to 25 of the port connector      The first successful family  74xx series  of integrated circuits used TTL  transistor   transistor logic   In TTL circuits  any voltage between 0 and 0 8 volts is called  lo  and any  voltage between 2 4 and 5 volts is called  hi   Connecting a negative voltage or anything  above 5 volts to a TTL input will produce smoke 1 The parallel port was originally built  using TTL and to this day these voltages define its  lo  and  hi  signals  Notice that in the  worst case there is only 1 6 volts difference between them     It is  of course  arbitrary whether we say that a  lo  represents a logic one or a logic zero   However  as is explained below   lo    one is actually better in most practical interface  circuits     For an output signal to do anything  some current will have to flow in the circuit connected  to it  When it is  hi  current will flow out of the computer  When it is  lo  current will flow  into the computer  The more current you have flowing in  the harder it is to keep the  voltage near zero so the nearer to the permitted limit of 0 8 volts  lo  will become   Similarly  current flowing out of a  hi  will make the voltage be lower and nearer to the 2 4  volts lower limit  So with too much current the difference between  lo  and  hi  will be  even less than 1 6 volts and things will be
246. rdinate of the controlled point in the displayed  coordinate system  This will generally be the coordinate system of the current Work Offset   initially 1   i e  G54  together with any G92 offsets applied  It can however be switched to  display Absolute Machine Coordinates     You can type a new value into any Axis DRO  This will modify the current Work Offset to  make the controlled point in the current coordinate system be the value you have set  You  are advised to set up Work Offsets using the Offsets screen until you are fully familiar with  working with multiple coordinate systems     6 2 2 2  Referenced  The LED is green if the axis has been referenced  i e  is in a known actual position     Each axis can be referenced using the Ref All button  Individual axes can be referenced on  the Diagnostics screen        If no home reference switch is defined for the axis  then the axis will not actually  be moved but  if Auto Zero DRO when homed is checked in Config gt Referencing   then the absolute machine coordinate of the current position of the axis will be set  to the value defined for the axis in the Home Reference switch locations table in  the Config gt State dialog  This is most often zero         If there is a home reference switch defined for the axis and it is not providing an  active input when the Ref is requested  then the axis will be moved in the     Figure 6 2   Axis control family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  
247. reens released with     Figure 6 16   Limits control family     Figure 6 17     System Settings  Safe Z  controls etc      Figure 6 15     Tangential control  family    Mach3 controls and running a part program    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  6 12    Mach3  You will need to hunt for them on Program Run  Settings and Diagnostics  screens     6 2 15 1 Units  This toggle implements the G20 and G21 codes to change the current measurement units   You are strongly advised not to do this except in small fragments of part program on  account of the fact that Work Offset and Tool Offset tables are in one fixed set of units     6 2 15 2 Safe Z  This family allows you to define the Z value which is clear of clamps and parts of the  workpiece  It will be used for homing and changing the tool     6 2 15 3 CV Mode Angular Limit  This LED is lit when the system is running in  Constant Velocity  mode  This will give  smoother and faster operation than  Exact stop  mode but may cause some rounding at  sharp corners depending on the speed of the axis drives  Even when the system is in CV  mode a corner with a change of direction more acute than the value given in the Angular  Limit DRO will be performed as if Exact Stop was selected  Full details of this are given  under Constant Velocity in chapter 10     6 2 15 4 Offline  This toggle and warning  LED  disconnects  all the  output signals of Mach3   This is intended for  machine setup and testing   Its use during a part  program will cause y
248. rent quantities use different specific units  Spindle speed is measured in revolutions  per minute  The positions of rotational axes are measured in degrees  Feed rates are  expressed in current length units per minute or in degrees per minute  as described above     Warning  We advise you to check very carefully the system s response to changing units  while tool and fixture offsets are loaded into the tables  while these offsets are active and or  while a part program is excecuting    10 1 11 Current Position  The controlled point is always at some location called the  current position  and Mach3  always knows where that is  The numbers representing the current position are adjusted in  the absence of any axis motion if any of several events take place          Length units are changed  but see Warning above          Tool length offset is changed         Coordinate system offsets are changed     10 1 12 Selected Plane  There is always a  selected plane   which must be the XY plane  the YZ plane  or the XZ   plane of the machining system  The Z axis is  of course  perpendicular to the XY plane  the  X axis to the YZ plane  and the Y axis to the XZ plane     10 1 13 Tool Table  Zero or one tool is assigned to each slot in the tool table     10 1 14 Tool Change  Mach3 allows you to implement a procedure for implementing automatic tool changes  using macros or to change the tools by hand when required     10 1 15 Pallet Shuttle  Mach3 allows you to implement a procedure for imp
249. ring acceleration and deceleration  is  probably more important than the cutting forces  The experience of others or experiments  will be the best guide  If you join the ArtSoft user group for Master5 Mach1 Mach3 on  Yahoo  you will have access to the experience of hundreds of other users     4 5 3  How the Step and Dir signals work  Mach3 puts outne pulse   logic 1  on the Step output  for each step that the axis is  to make  The Dir output will  have been set before the step  pulse appears     The logic waveform will be  like that shown in figure 4 4   The gap between the  pulses will be smaller the  higher the speed of the  steps     Drive electronics usually  use the Active Lo  configuration for Step  and Dir signals  Mach3 should be setup so these outputs are Active Lo  If this is not done    Step pulse  0    1    Figure 4 4   Step pulse waveform    Step if incorrectly  set Active Hi  0    1     Figure 4 5   Wrongly configured output alters step waveform    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  4 8    then the Step signal still goes up and down but the drive thinks that the gaps between the  pulses are the pulses and vice versa and this often causes very rough or unreliable running  of the motor  The  inverted  pulses are shown in figure 4 5     4 6  Limit and Home switches    4 6 1  Strategies  Limit switches are used to prevent any linear  axis moving too far and so causing damage to  the structure of the machine  You can run
250. rograms by    Mach3    It assumes a limited understanding of simple G codes and their function     8 1  Introduction    As you will have seen Mach3Mill uses a part program to control the tool movement in your  machine tool  You may have written part programs by hand  spiral txt is such an example   or generated them using a CAD CAM  Computer Aided Design Computer Aided  Manufacturing  system     Importing files which define  graphics  in DXF  HPGL  BMP or JPEG formats provides an  intermediate level of programming  It is easier than coding by hand but provides much less  control of the machine than a program output by a CAD CAM package     The Automatic Z control feature  q v  and repetitive execution decrementing the Inhibit Z  value is a powerful tool for making a series of roughing cuts based on imported DXF and  HPGL files     8 2  DXF import    Most CAD programs will allow you to output a file in DXF format even though they do not  offer any CAM features  A file will contain the description of the start and finish of lines  and arcs in the drawing together with the layer that they are drawn on  Mach3 will import  such a file and allow you to assign a particular tool  feed rate and  depth of cut  to each  layer  The DXF file must be in text format  not binary  and Mach3 will only import lines   polylines  circles and arcs  not text      During import you can  a  optimise the order of the lines to minimise non cutting moves    b  use the actual coordinates of the drawing o
251. rs of inputs to each of which an encoder with quadrature outputs can be  connected  typically these might be  glass scale  encoders   see figure 4 15  Mach3 will  display the position of each of these encoders on a dedicated DRO  These values can be  loaded from and saved to the  main axis DROs     Inside the case of the encoder  is a glass  or sometimes  plastic  strip ruled with lines   e g often 10 microns wide   separated by the same sized  clear space  A light shining  on a phototransistor through  the ruling would give a signal  like A in figure 4 14  One  complete cycle corresponds  to a movement of 20  microns     Another light and phototransistor located 5 microns away from the first one would give  signal B a quarter of a cycle out from A  hence the name quadrature     A full explanation is rather long  but you will notice that a signal changes every 5 microns  of movement so the resolution of the scale is 5 microns  We can tell which way it is moving  by the sequence of changes  For example if B goes from lo to hi when A is hi  point x  then  we are moving to the right of the marked start whereas if B goes from hi to lo when A is hi   point y  then we are moving to the left of the start     Mach3 expects logic signals  Some  glass scales  e g certain Heidenhain  models  give an analog sinewave   This allows clever electronics to  interpolate to a higher resolution  than 5 microns  If you want to use  these than you need to square off  the waveform with an operation
252. s    G30  Return home    G31  Straight probe    G40  Cancel cutter radius compensation    G41 G42  Start cutter radius compensation left right    G43  Apply tool length offset  plus     G49  Cancel tool length offset    G50  Reset all scale factors to 1 0    G51  Set axis data input scale factors    G52  Temporary coordinate system offsets    G53  Move in absolute machine coordinate system    G54  Use fixture offset 1    G55  Use fixture offset 2    G56  Use fixture offset 3    G57  Use fixture offset 4    G58  Use fixture offset 5    G59  Use fixture offset 6   use general fixture number    G61 G64  Exact stop Constant Velocity mode    G68 G69  Rotate program coordinate system    G70 G71  Inch Millimetre unit    G73  Canned cycle   peck drilling    G80  Cancel motion mode  including canned cycles     G81  Canned cycle   drilling    G82  Canned cycle   drilling with dwell    G83  Canned cycle   peck drilling    G84  Canned cycle   right hand rigid tapping    G85 G86 G  88 G89  Canned cycle   boring    G90  Absolute distance mode    G91  Incremental distance mode    G92  Offset coordinates and set parameters    G92 x  Cancel G92 etc     G93  Inverse time feed mode    G94  Feed per minute mode    G95  Feed per rev mode    G98  Initial level return after canned cycles    G99  R point level return after canned cycles    Figure 10 4   Table of G codes     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 16    U  V and W are synonyms for A  B and C  Use of A with U  B wit
253. s   G43  G44 and G49  To use a tool length offset  program G43 H   where the H number is the desired index in  the tool table  It is expected that all entries in this table will be positive  The H number  should be  but does not have to be  the same as the slot number of the tool currently in the  spindle  It is OK for the H number to be zero  an offset value of zero will be used  Omitting  H has the same effect as a zero value     G44 is provided for compatibility and is used if entries in the table give negative offsets     It is an error if         the H number is not an integer  is negative  or is larger than the number of carousel  slots     To use no tool length offset  program G49    It is OK to program using the same offset already in use  It is also OK to program using no  tool length offset if none is currently being used     10 7 15 Scale factors G50 and G51  To define a scale factor which will be applied to an X  Y  Z  A  B  C  I  amp  J word before it is  used program G51 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  where the X  Y  Z etc  words are the scale  factors for the given axes  These values are  of course  never themselves scaled     It is not permitted to use unequal scale factors to produce elliptical arcs with G2 or G3     To reset the scale factors of all axes to 1 0 program G50    10 7 16 Temporary Coordinate system offset     G52  To offset the current point by a given positive or negative distance  without motion    program  G52 X  Y  Z  A  B  C    where the axis words cont
254. s  name in the point cloud file     THC Options  The checkbox name is self explanatory     Compensation G41 G42  The Advanced Compensation Analysis checkbox turns on a  more thorough lookahead analysis that will reduce the risk of gouging when compensating  for cutter diameter  using G41 and G42  on complex shapes     Homed true when no Home switches  Will make the system appear to be referenced  i e   LEDs green  at all times  It should only be used if no Home switches are defined under  Ports  amp  Pins Inputs tab      Figure 5 9     Mill Options Tab    Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 9    5 3 8 Testing  Your software is now configured sufficiently for you to do some simple tests with the  hardware  If it is convenient to connect up the inputs from the manual switches such as  Home then do so now     Run Mach3Mill and display the Diagnostics screen  This has a bank of LEDs displaying the  logic level of the inputs and outputs  Ensure that the external Emergency Stop signal is not  active  Red Emergency LED not flashing  and press the red Reset button on the screen  Its  LED should stop flashing     If you have associated any outputs with coolant or spindle rotation then you can use the  relevant buttons on the diagnostic screen to turn the outputs on and off  The machine should  also respond or you can monitor the voltages of the signals with a multimeter     Next operate the home or the limit switches  You should see the appropriate LEDs glow  yellow w
255. s direction  Similarly if the box is  unchecked then the axis moves in the plus direction until the input is active and the minus  direction if it is already active     5 6 1 2  Position of home switches  If the Auto Zero checkbox is checked then the axis DROs will be set to the  Reference Home Switch location values defined in the Home Off  column  rather than  actual Zero   This can be useful to minimise homing time on a very large and slow axis     It is  of course  necessary to have separate limit and reference switches if the reference  switch is not at the end of an axis     5 6 1 3  Configure Soft Limits  As discussed above most implementations of limit switches involve some compromises and  hitting them accidentally will require intervention by the operator and may require the  system to be reset and re referenced  Soft limits can provide a protection against this sort of  inconvenient accident     The software will refuse to allow the axes to move outside the declared range of the soft  limits of the X  Y and Z axes  These can be set in the range  999999 to   999999 units for  each axis  When jogging motion gets near to the limit then its speed will be reduced when  inside an Slow Zone which is defined in the table      Figure 5 16     Homing  referencing     Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 19    If the Slow Zone is too big then you will reduce the effective working area of the machine   If they are set too small then you risk hitting the hardwar
256. s type a  tool path contour   This is  the sort of code that a CAD CAM program might produce if it is aware of the  intended cutter diameter  The interpreter does not have any setting that determines which type of contour is used  but  the numerical description of the contour will  of course  differ  for the same part geometry   between the two types and the values for diameters in the tool table will be different for the  two types     9 2 1  Material Edge Contour  When the contour is the edge of the material  the outline of the edge is described in the part  program  For a material edge contour  the value for the diameter in the tool table is the  actual value of the diameter of the tool  The value in the table must be positive  The NC  code for a material edge contour is the same regardless of the  actual or intended  diameter  of the tool     Example1     Here is an NC program which cuts material away from the outside of the triangle in figure  10 1 above  In this example  the cutter compensation radius is the actual radius of the tool in  use  which is 0 5  The value for the diameter in the tool table is twice the radius  which is  1 0     N0010 G41 G1 X2 Y2  turn compensation on and make entry move   N0020 Y 1  follow right side of triangle   N0030 X 2  follow bottom side of triangle   N0040 X2 Y2  follow hypotenuse of triangle   N0050 G40  turn compensation off   This will result in the tool following a path consisting of an entry move and the path shown  on the left g
257. see the documentation of your ModBus  device     5 3 6 5  General Parameters  These allow you to control the delay after starting or stopping the spindle before Mach3  will execute further commands  i e  a Dwell   These delays can be used to allow time for  acceleration before a cut is made and to provide some software protection from going  directly from clockwise to counterclockwise  The dwell times are entered in seconds     Immediate Relay off before delay  if checked will switch the spindle relay off as soon as the  M5 is executed  If unchecked it stays on until the spin down delay period has elapsed     5 3 6 6  Pulley ratios  Mach3 has control over the speed of your spindle motor  You program spindle speeds  through the S word  The Mach3 pulley system allows you to define the relationship  between these for four different pulley or gearbox settings  It is easier to understand how it  works after tuning your spindle motor so it is described in section 5 5 6 1 below     5 3 6 7  Special function  Laser mode should always be unchecked except for controlling the power of a cutting laser  by the feedrate      Use Spindle feedback in sync mode should be un checked     Configuring Mach3    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  5 8    Closed Loop Spindle Control  when checked  implements a software servo loop which tries  to match the actual spindle speed seen by the Index or Timing sensor with that demanded  by the S word  The exact speed of the spindle is not likely to be important 
258. sing Mach3Mill  1    13  Appendix 3   Record of configuration used    You should keep a paper record of your Mach3 setup     A complete Mach3 configuration includes a lot of detailed information  You will not wish  to repeat the process step by step when you update your computer     Mach3 profiles are  XML files and you will probably keep them in the Mach3 folder  Use  Windows Explorer to find the profile you wish to copy and drag it to another folder while  holding down the Control key  You can of course use any other file copying technique if  you prefer     If you double click the file name then your web browser  probably Internet Explorer  will  open the  xml file and display it    The XML file can be edited by a text editor such as Notepad but this is strongly not  recommended     The profile file can be useful information to attach to an e mail when asking for support  from ArtSoft Corp     Figure 13 1     Internet Explorer displaying Profile    Revision History    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  2    14  Revision history     Rev 1 84 B1  14 April 2006  User reported typos corrected  thanks for sending them in      Rev 1 84 A1  11 April 2006  Version to support Rev 1 84    Rev 7 1 A1  25 April 2005  Initial preliminary release of Using Mach3Mill    Rev A1 8  22 July 2003  First complete release on Using Mach2Mill      Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3    15  Index    Hint  Where there is a choice  most index entries are made using the name of a thing     e g  Axis drive  ra
259. sing Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  7 8    given values of X  Y and or Z     When you use G92 you tell Mach3 what you want the coordinates of the current Controlled  Point to be values given by X  Y and or Z     Neither G52 nor G92 move the tool they just add another set of offsets to the origin of the  Current Coordinate system     7 7 1  Using G52  A simple example of using G52 is where you might wish to produce two identical shapes  ate different places on the workpiece  The code we looked at before draws a 1  square with  a corner at X   0 8  Y   0 3     G20 F10 G90  set up imperial units  a slow feed rate etc    G0 Z2 0  lift pen   G0 X0 8 Y0 3  rapid to bottom left of square   G1 Z0 0  pen down   Y1 3  we can leave out the G1 as we have just done one   X1 8  Y0 3  going clockwise round shape   X0 8  G0 X0 0 Y0 0 Z2 0  move pen out of the way and lift it     If we want another square but the second one with its corner at X  3 0 and Y   2 3 then the  above code can be used twice but using G52 to apply and offset before the second copy     G20 F10 G90  set up imperial units  a slow feed rate etc    G0 Z2 0  lift pen   G0 X0 8 Y0 3  rapid to bottom left of square   G1 Z0 0  pen down   Y1 3  we can leave out the G1 as we have just done one   X1 8  Y0 3  going clockwise round shape   X0 8  G0 Z2 0  lift pen   G52 X2 2 Y2  temporary offset for second square   G0 X0 8 Y0 3  rapid to bottom left of square   G1 Z0 0  pen down   Y1 3  we can leave out the G1 as we have just done one   X1
260. so you are not  likely to need to use this feature in Mach3Turn     If you do use it then the P  I and D variables should be set in the range 0 to 1  P controls the  gain of the loop and an excessive value will make the speed oscillate  or hunt  around the  requested value rather than settling on it  The D variable applies damping so stabilising  these oscillations by using the derivative  rate of change  of the speed  The I variable takes  a long term view of the difference between actual and requested speed and so increases the  accuracy in the steady state  Tuning these values is assisted by using the dialog opened by  Operator gt Calibrate spindle     Spindle Speed Averaging  when checked  causes Mach3 to average the time between  index timing pulses over several revolutions when it is deriving the actual spindle speed   You might find it useful with a very low inertia spindle drive or one where the control tends  to give short term variations of speed     5 3 7 Mill Options tab  The final tab on Config gt Ports  amp  Pins is Mill Options  See figure 5 9     Z inhibit  The Z inhibit On checkbox enables this function  Max Depth gives the lowest Z  value to which the axis will move  The Persistent checkbox remembers the state  which can  be changed by a screen toggle  from run to run of Mach3     Digitising  The 4 Axis Point Clouds checkbox enables recording of the state of the A axis  as well as X  Y and Z  The Add Axis Letters to Coordinates prefixes the data with the axi
261. ssion is a set of characters starting with a left bracket   and ending with a  balancing right bracket    In between the brackets are numbers  parameter values   mathematical operations  and other expressions  An expression may be evaluated to  produce a number  The expressions on a line are evaluated when the line is read  before  anything on the line is executed  An example of an expression is    1 acos 0    3   4 0 2       Binary operations appear only inside expressions  Nine binary operations are defined  There  are four basic mathematical operations  addition      subtraction      multiplication      and  division      There are three logical operations  non exclusive or  OR   exclusive or  XOR    and logical and  AND   The eighth operation is the modulus operation  MOD   The ninth  operation is the  power  operation      of raising the number on the left of the operation to  the power on the right     The binary operations are divided into three groups  The first group is  power  The second  group is  multiplication  division  and modulus  The third group is  addition  subtraction   logical non exclusive or  logical exclusive or  and logical and  If operations are strung  together  for example in the expression  2 0 3 1 5 5 5 11 0    operations in the  first group are to be performed before operations in the second group and operations in the  second group before operations in the third group  If an expression contains more than one  operation from the same group  such
262. t do not totally retract the drill from the hole  It is  suitable for tools with long flutes which will clear the broken chips from the hole  This  cycle takes a Q number which represents a  delta  increment along the Z axis  Program    G73 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L  Q        Preliminary motion  as described in G81 to 89 canned cycles          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate downward by delta or to the Z  position  whichever is less deep          Rapid back out by the distance defined in the G73 Pullback DRO on the Settings  screen          Rapid back down to the current hole bottom  backed off a bit          Repeat steps 1  2  and 3 until the Z position is reached at step 1          Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z     It is an error if         the Q number is negative or zero     10 7 23 Cancel Modal Motion   G80  Program G80 to ensure no axis motion will occur  It is an error if         Axis words are programmed when G80 is active  unless a modal group 0 G code is  programmed which uses axis words     10 7 24 Canned Cycles   G81 to G89  The canned cycles G81 through G89 have been implemented as described in this section   Two examples are given with the description of G81 below     All canned cycles are performed with respect to the currently selected plane  Any of the  three planes  XY  YZ  ZX  may be selected  Throughout this section  most of the  descriptions assume the XY plane has been selected  The behavior is always analogous if  the YZ or X
263. t point is at X 4 in the currently specified  coordinate system and the current X axis offset is zero  then G92 X7 sets the X axis offset  to  3  sets parameter 5211 to  3  and causes the X coordinate of the current point to be 7     The axis offsets are always used when motion is specified in absolute distance mode using  any of the fixture coordinate systems Thus all fixture coordinate systems are affected by  G92     Being in incremental distance mode has no effect on the action of G92     Non zero offsets may be already be in effect when the G92 is called  They are in effect  discarded before the new value is applied  Mathematically the new value of each offset is  A B  where A is what the offset would be if the old offset were zero  and B is the old  offset  For example  after the previous example  the X value of the current point is 7  If  G92 X9 is then programmed  the new X axis offset is  5  which is calculated by   7 9       3   Put another way the G92 X9 produces the same offset whatever G92 offset was already  in place     To reset axis offsets to zero  program G92 1 or G92 2 G92 1 sets parameters 5211 to  5216 to zero  whereas G92 2 leaves their current values alone     To set the axis offset values to the values given in parameters 5211 to 5216  program  G92 3    You can set axis offsets in one program and use the same offsets in another program   Program G92 in the first program  This will set parameters 5211 to 5216  Do not use G92 1  in the remainder of the f
264. t some help     On the first reading you might not want to bother with sections after 4 6     4 1  Safety   emphasised    Any machine tool is potentially dangerous  This manual tries to give you  guidance on safety precautions and techniques but because we do not know  the details of your machine or local conditions we can accept no responsibility  for the performance of any machine or any damage or injury caused by its use   It is your responsibility to ensure that you understand the implications of what  you design and build and to comply with any legislation and codes of practice  applicable to your country or state     If you are in any doubt you must seek guidance from a professionally qualified expert  rather than risk injury to yourself or to others     4 2  What Mach3 can control    Mach3 is a very flexible program designed to control machines like milling machines  and  although not described here  turning machines   The characteristics of these machines used  by Mach3 are          Some user controls  An emergency stop  EStop  button must be provided on every  machine         Two or three axes which are at right angles to each other  referred to as X  Y and  Z          A tool which moves relative to a workpiece  The origin of the axes is fixed in  relation to the workpiece  The relative movement can  of course  be by  i  the tool  moving  e g  the quill of a milling spindle moves the tool in the Z direction or a lathe  tool mounted on a cross slide and a saddle moves
265. talled  If you update your system with a newer version then the reboot  is not vital  The install sequence does however still ask you to do it  Windows XP boots  reasonably quickly that it is not much hardship to do it every time     3 1 4  Convenient desktop icons  So you have rebooted  The installation wizard will have created desktop icons for the main  programs  Mach3 exe is the actual user interface code  If you run it  it will ask which Profile  you wish to use  Mach3Mill  Mach3Turn etc  are shortcuts which run this with a Profile  defined by a   p  argument in the shortcut target  You will usually employ these to start the  required system     It is now worthwhile to setup some icons for desktop shortcuts to other Mach3 programs   Use Windows  Explorer  right   click Start  and  by right clicking  on the  DriverTest exe  file  Drag this  shortcut onto  your desktop   Other programs  such as a screen  designer and a  manipulator for  screenset files  are available as a    Figure 3 2     The running DriverTest    Overview of Mach3 software    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3 3    separate download     3 1 5  Testing the installation  It is now highly recommended to test the system  As mentioned above  Mach3 is not a  simple program  It takes great liberties with Windows in order to perform its job  this means  it will not work on all systems due to many factors  For example  the QuickTime system  monitor  qtask exe  running in the background can kill it and there will be 
266. terface      See Step  amp  Direction  Disclaimer of liability                                        1 1  Downloading Mach3                                         3 1  Drilling canned cycle  G81                                                          10 26  Drilling with dwell canned cycle  G82                                                          10 27  Driver test program                                           3 3  DRO  cancelling entry in                                         3 6  caution when changing axis                           3 6  control on screens                                         3 5  entering data to                                             3 6  DROs locked to initial units                             5 23  Dwell                                                              10 6  G04   defined                                            10 18  DXF file import                                                 8 1  action for layers                                            8 2  connecting lines that nearly touch                  8 3  generation and filing G code                         8 3  optimise tool movement                                8 3  position of origin                                           8 3  z level for rapid moves                                  8 3    E    Editing G code program                                  6 16  Editor program  configure filename for                                 5 23     Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mi
267. the editor  This is  probably most easily done by using the close box and replying Yes to the  Do you want to  save the changes   dialog     While editing  Mach3 is suspended  If you click in its window it will appear to be locked  up  You can easily recover by returning to the editor and closing it     After editing the revised code will again be analysed and used to regenerate the toolpath  and extrema  You can regenerate the toolpath at any time using the Regenerate button     6 6  Manual preparation and running a part program    6 6 1  Inputting a hand written program  If you want to write a program  from scratch  then you can either do so by running the  editor outside Mach3 and saving the file or you can use the Edit button with no part  program loaded  In this case you will have to Save As the completed file and exit the editor     In both cases you will have to use File gt Load G code to load your new program into Mach3     Warning  Errors in lines of code are generally ignored  You should not rely on being given  a detailed syntax check     6 6 2  Before you run a part program  It is good practice for a part program to make no assumptions about the state of the machine  when it starts  It should therefore include G17 G18 G19  G20 G21  G40  G49  G61 G62   G90 G91  G93 G94     Mach3 controls and running a part program    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  6 17    You should ensure that the axes are in a known reference position   probably by using the  Ref All button     Yo
268. ther than an action  e g  Tuning  so you will get better results    thinking about the part on which you want information  Thus looking for  Axis drives      tuning  will give better results than looking for  Tuning   axis drives   For important    information both entries will probably appear     If you have difficulty because you tried to look something up and the index    entry was missing  please take a moment to e mail support artofcnc ca  with a note of  a  the words you were looking up and  b  where in the    manual you found the information you wanted   assuming you did              introducing comments                             10 12    A    Absolute distance mode  G90                                                          10 30  Absolute IJ mode                                          10 17  Absolute machine coordinates  G53   move in                                           10 23  Acceleration  configuring                                                 5 14  importance of configuration for accuracy    5 14  Acknowledgements                                           1 1  Active Hi convention                                        4 4  Active Lo convention                                        4 4  Active plane  configuring default                                      5 21  Addon CAM function  Wizards for                                                   3 8  Allow speech                                                  5 24  Allow wave files                 
269. this chapter  remember that you do not have an unlimited number of  inputs outputs  Even with two parallel ports there are only ten inputs for supporting all  functions and  although a keyboard emulator will help giving more inputs  these cannot be  used for all functions  You may have to use a ModBus device to dramatically expand  custom input output     Configuring Mach3    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  5 1    5   Configuring Mach3 for your machine and drives    If you have bought a machine tool with a computer running Mach3 then you  will probably not need to read this chapter  except out of general interest    Your supplier will probably have installed the Mach3 software and set it up    and or will have given you detailed instructions on what to do     You are recommended to ensure that you have a paper copy of how Mach3 is    configured should you ever need to re install the software from scratch     Mach3 stores this information in an XML file which you can view     5 1  A configuration strategy    This chapter contains a lot of very fine detail  You should  however  find that the  configuration process is straightforward if you take it step by step  testing as you go  A  good strategy is to skim through the chapter and then work with it on your computer and  machine tool  We will assume that you have already installed Mach3 for the dry running  described in chapter 3     Virtually all the work you will do in this chapter is based on dialog boxes reached from the  Conf
270. this work   The right to make copies of this manual is granted solely for the purpose of evaluating  and or using licensed or demonstration copies of Mach3  It is not permitted  under this  right  for third parties to charge for copies of this manual     Every effort has been made to make this manual as complete and as accurate as possible but  no warranty or fitness is implied  The information provided is on an  as is  basis  The  authors and publisher shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity  with respect to any loss or damages arising from the information contained in this manual      Preface    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  1 2    Use of the manual is covered by the license conditions to which you must agree when  installing Mach3 software     Windows XP and Windows 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  If  other trademarks are used in this manual but not acknowledged please notify ArtSoft  Corporation so this can be remedied in subsequent editions     Introduction    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  2 1    2   Introducing CNC machining systems    2 1  Parts of a machining system    This chapter will introduce you to terminology used in the rest of this manual    and allow you to understand the purpose of the different components in a    numerically controlled milling system     The main parts of a system for numerically controlled mill are shown in figure 1 1    The designer of a part generally uses a Computer Aided Design C
271. those in Appendix 1  If there    Overview of Mach3 software    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  3 5    are major differences then your system supplier should have given you a revised set of  screenshots to match your system     Double click the Mach3Mill icon to run the program  You should see the Mill Program Run  screen similar to that in Appendix 1  but with the various DROs set to zero  no program  loaded etc       Notice the red Reset button  It will have a flashing Red Green LED  simulation of a light  emitting diode  above it and some yellow LEDs lit  If you click the button then the yellow  LEDs go out and the flashing LED turns to solid green  Mach3 is ready for action     If you cannot reset then the problem is probably something plugged into your parallel port  or ports  a  dongle  perhaps  or the PC has previously had Mach3 installed on it with an  unusual allocation of port pins to the Emergency Stop  EStop signal   By clicking on the  Offline button you should be able to Reset the system  Most of the tests and  demonstrations in this chapter will not work unless Mach3 is reset out of the EStop  mode     3 2 1  Types of object on screens  You will see that the Program Run screen is made up of the following types of object         Buttons  e g  Reset  Stop Alt S  etc          DROs or Digital Readouts  Anything with a number displayed will be a DRO  The  main ones are  of course the current positions of the X  Y  Z  A  B  amp  C axes         LEDs  in various sizes and
272. ting holes out of a piece before it is cut from the surrounding material     8 2 3  Conversion options  Next you choose the options for the conversion process  see step 3 on figure 8 2      DXF Information  Gives general details of your file which are useful for diagnostic  purposes     Optimise  If Optimise is not checked then the entities  lines etc   will be cut in the order in  which they appear in the DXF file  If it is checked then they will be re ordered to minimise  the amount of rapid traverse movement required  Note that the cuts are always optimised to  minimise the number of tool changes required     As Drawn  If As Drawn is not checked then the zero coordinates of the G code will be the   bottom left corner  of the drawing  If it is checked then the coordinates of the drawing will  be the coordinates of the G code produced     Plasma Mode  If Plasma Mode is checked then M3 and M5 commands will be produced to  turn the arc laser on and off between cuts  If it is not checked then the spindle will be  started at the beginning of the part program  stopped for tool changes and finally stopped at  the end of the program     Connection Tol  Two lines on the same layer will be considered to join if the distance  between their ends is less than the value of this control  This means that they will be cut  without a move to the  Rapid Plane  being inserted between them  If the original drawing  was drawn with some sort of  snap  enabled then this feature is probably not req
273. tinue running the part  program  You can provide Visual Basic code in the macros to operate your own mechanical  tool changer and to move the axes to a convenient location to tool changing if you wish     If tool change requests are set to be ignored  in Configure gt Logic  then M6 has no effect     10 8 4 Coolant Control   M7  M8  M9  To turn flood coolant on  program M7     To turn mist coolant on  program M8     To turn all coolant off  program M9     It is always OK to use any of these commands  regardless of what coolant is on or off     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 34    10 8 5 Re run from first line   M47  On encountering an M47 the part program will continue running from its first line  It is an  error if         M47 is executed in a subroutine  The run can be stopped by the Pause or Stop buttons    See also the use of M99 outside a subroutine to achieve the same effect     10 8 6 Override Control   M48 and M49  To enable the speed and feed override  program M48  To disable both overrides  program  M49  It is OK to enable or disable the switches when they are already enabled or disabled     10 8 7 Call subroutine   M98  This has two formats      a  To call a subroutine program within the current part program file code M98 P  L  or  M98  P  Q The program must contain an O line with the number given by the P word of  the Call   This O line is a sort of  label  which indicates the start of the subroutine  The O  line may not have a line numb
274. to  5 7 4 8          a feed parallel to the Z axis to  5 7  4 2          a traverse parallel to the Z axis to  5 7 4 8     The second repeat consists of 3 moves  The X position is reset to 9   5 4  and the Y  position to 12   7 5           a traverse parallel to the XY plane to  9 12 4 8          a feed parallel to the Z axis to  9 12  4 2          a traverse parallel to the Z axis to  9 12 4 8   The third repeat consists of 3 moves  The X position is reset to 13   9 4  and the Y  position to 17   12 5           a traverse parallel to the XY plane to  13 17 4 8          a feed parallel to the Z axis to  13 17  4 2          a traverse parallel to the Z axis to  13 17 4 8     10 7 24 3  G82 Cycle  The G82 cycle is intended for drilling  Program    G82 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L  P          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Dwell for the P number of seconds          Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z     10 7 24 4  G83 Cycle  The G83 cycle  often called peck drilling  is intended for deep drilling or milling with chip  breaking  See also G73  The retracts in this cycle clear the hole of chips and cut off any  long stringers  which are common when drilling in aluminum   This cycle takes a Q number  which represents a  delta  increment along the Z axis  Program    G83 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L  Q          Preliminary motion  as described above     G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  
275. to the Pen Down Z level and an M5  Spindle Stop  before the  move to the Pen Up level to control the laser     8 3 4  Writing the G code file  Finally  having defined the import translations  click Import File to actually import the data  to Mach3Mill  You will be prompted for the name to use for the file which will store the  generated code  You should type the full name including the extension which you wish to  use or select an existing file to overwrite  Conventionally this extension will be  TAP     After writing the file click OK to return to Mach3  Your G Code file will have been loaded     Notes         The import filter is run by suspending Mach3 and running the filter program  If  you switch to the Mach3Mill screen  for example by accidentally clicking on it   then it will appear to have locked up  You can easily continue by using the  Windows task bar to return to the filter and completing the import process  This is  similar to the way the Editor for part programs is run         If your  TAP file already exists and is open in Mach3  then the import filter will  not be able to write to it  Suppose you have tested an import and want to change  the translations by importing again  then you need to make sure that you close the   TAP file in Mach3Mill before repeating the import         It is generally easiest to work in metric units throughout when importing HPGL  files         If you use the  Laser Table  option with a laser or plasma cutter then you need to  check i
276. trol its speed and direction of rotation   Mach3 will take account of a variable step pulley drive or gearbox between the motor and  the spindle  For full details see Motor Tuning in chapter 5    3  PWM motor control    As an alternative to Step and Direction control  Mach3 will output a pulse width modulated  signal whose duty cycle is the percentage of full speed that you require  You could  for  example  convert the duty cycle of the signal to a voltage   PWM signal on for 0  of time  gives 0 volts 50  gives 5 volts and 100  gives 10 volts  and use this to control an  induction motor with a variable frequency inverter drive  Alternatively the PWM signal  could be used to trigger a triac in a simple DC speed controller     Figures 4 12 and 4 13  show the pulse width at  approximately 20  of  the cycle and 50  of the  cycle     In order for the PWM  spindle speed signal to be  turned into direct current   actually a direct voltage  is generally used as the input to variable speed drives  but you know what we mean  the  pulse signal it must transformed  In essence a circuit is used to find the average of the pulse  width modulated signal   The circuit can be a  simple capacitor and  resistor or be much more  complex depending  a   on how linear you want  the relationship between  the width and the final  output voltage and  b  on  the speed of response  you need to the changing pulse width     Ave     Figure 4 12     A 20  pulse width modulated signal    Ave     Figure 4 13  
277. ts too great then the drive will probably signal a fault condition but even if  it does not then the accuracy of the cutting will have suffered  This will be explained in  more detail shortly     5 5 3 2  Testing different acceleration values  Try starting and stopping your machine with different settings of the Acceleration slider in  the Motor Tuning dialog  At low accelerations  a gentle slope on the graph  you will be able  to hear the speed ramping up and down     5 5 3 3  Why you want to avoid a big servo error  Most moves made in a part program are co ordinated with two  or more  axes moving  together  Thus in a move from X 0  Y 0 to X 2  Y 1  Mach3 will move the X axis at  twice the speed of the Y axis  It not only co ordinates the movements at constant speed but  ensures that the speed required relationship applies during acceleration and deceleration but  accelerating all motions at a speed determined by the  slowest  axis     If you specify too high an acceleration for a given axis then Mach3 will assume it can use  this value but as  in practice  the axis lags behind what is commanded  i e  the servo error is  big  then the path cut in the work will be inaccurate     5 5 3 4  Choosing an acceleration value  It is quite possible  knowing all the masses of parts  moments of inertia of the motor and  screws  friction forces and the torque available from the motor to calculate what  acceleration can be achieved with a given error  Ballscrew and linear slide manufactur
278. u need to decide whether the program starts with an S word or if you need to set the  spindle speed by hand or by entering a value in the S DRO     You will need to ensure that a suitable feedrate is set before any G01 G02 G03 commands  are executed  This may be done by an F word or entering data into the F DRO     Next you may need to select a Tool and or Work Offset     Finally  unless the program has been proved to be valid you should attempt a dry run   cutting  air  to see that nothing terrible happens     6 6 3  Running your program  You should monitor the first run of any program with great care  You may find that you  need to override the feed rate or  perhaps  spindle speed to minimise chattering or to  optimise production  When you want to make changes you should either do this on the  fly   or use the Pause button  make your changes and the click Cycle Start     6 7  Building G code by importing other files    Mach3 will convert files in DXF  HPGL or JPEG  format into G code which will cut a representation  of them     This is done using the File gt Import  HPGL BMP JPG or the File gt Import gt DXF menu   Having chosen a file type you have to load the  original file  You are prompted for parameters to  define the conversion and feed and coolant  commands to be included in the part program  You  the import the data  Mach3 has to create a  TAP working file which contains the generated  G code  so you will be prompted by a file save dialog for a name and folder for th
279. uired     Rapid plane  This control defines the Z value to be adopted during rapid moves between  entities in the drawing     Lathe mode  If Lathe Mode is checked then the horizontal  plus X  direction of the drawing  will be coded as Z in the G code and the vertical   plus Y  will be coded as minus X so that  a part outline drawn with the horizontal axis of the drawing as its centerline is displayed and  cut correctly in Mach3Turn     8 2 4  Generation of G code  Finally click Generate G code to perform step 4  It is conventional to save the generated G   code file with a  TAP extension but this is not required and Mach3 will not insert the  extension automatically     You can repeat steps 2 to 4  or indeed 1 to 4 and when you have finished these click Done     Mach3 will load the last G code file which you have generated  Notice the comments  identifying its name and date of creation     Notes         The generated G code has feedrates depending on the layers imported  Unless your  spindle responds to the S word  you will have to manually set up the spindle speed  and change speeds during tool changes         DXF input is good for simple shapes as it only requires a basic CAD program to  generate the input file and it works to the full accuracy of your original drawing        DXF is good for defining parts for laser or plasma cutting where the  tool   diameter is very small        For milling you will have to make your own manual allowances for the diameter of  the cutter  
280. units are millimetres  and the feed rate  has been set with the command F150  then the speed should be set with the command S300   since 150 x 2   300     If the feed and speed override switches are enabled and not set at 100   the one set at the  lower setting will take effect  The speed and feed rates will still be synchronized     10 7 24 6  G85 Cycle  The G85 cycle is intended for boring or reaming  but could be used for drilling or milling   Program G85 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Retract the Z axis at the current feed rate to clear Z     10 7 24 7  G86 Cycle  The G86 cycle is intended for boring  This cycle uses a P number for the number of seconds  to dwell  Program G86 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L  P          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Dwell for the P number of seconds          Stop the spindle turning          Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z     G and M code reference    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  10 29         Restart the spindle in the direction it was going     The spindle must be turning before this cycle is used  It is an error if         the spindle is not turning before this cycle is executed     10 7 24 8  G87 Cycle    The G87 cycle is intended for back boring  Program    G87 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R  L  I  J  K     The situation  as sho
281. ut Signals Selection Page tab  figure 5 6  for the Spindle Step and Spindle  Direction  These pins must be connected to your motor drive electronics  Apply the changes     Define External Activation signals in Ports and Pins and Configure gt Output Devices to  switch the spindle motor controller on off if you wish to take power off the motor when the  spindle is stopped by M5  It will not be rotating anyway of course as Mach3 will not be  sending step pulses but  depending on the driver design  may still be dissipating power     Now move to Configure gt Motor Tuning for the  Spindle Axis   The units for this will be  one revolution  So the Steps per Unit are the number of pulses for one rev  e g  2000 for a  10 times micro stepping drive or 4 x the line count of a servomotor encoder or the  equivalent with electronic gearing      The Vel box should be set to the number of revs per second at full speed  So a 3600 rpm  motor would need to be set to 60  This is not possible with a high line count encoder on  account of the maximum pulse rate from Mach3   e g  a 100 line encoder allows 87 5 revs  per second on a 35 000 Hz system   The spindle will generally require a powerful motor  whose drive electronics is likely to include electronic gearing which overcomes this  constraint     The Accel box can be set by experiment to give a smooth start and stop to the spindle  Note   that if you want to enter a very small value in the Accel box you do this by typing rather  than using the 
282. ved  Such a machine would have a separate home switch  for the Z axis  thus requiring another input on the parallel port but still only four inputs in a  three axis machine  and would use the ability of Mach3 to set any value for an axis DRO   after referencing  to make machine Z zero to be the top of the column     Separate high accuracy home switch    The X and Y axes on a high precision machine might have a separate home switch to  achieve the required accuracy     Limit switches of multiple axes connected together    Because Mach3 does not take any notice of which limit of which axis has tripped  then all  the limits can be ORed together and fed into one limit input  Each axis can then have its  own reference switch connected to the reference input  A three axis machine still only needs  four inputs     Home switches of multiple axes connected together    If you are really short of inputs to Mach3 then you can OR the home switches together and  define all home inputs to be that signal  In this case you can only reference one axis at once      so you need to remove REF All buttons from your screens     and your home switches  must all be at the end of travel on their respective axes     Slaving    On a gantry type miller or router where the two  legs  of the gantry are driven by separate  motors then each motor should be driven by its own axis  Suppose the gantry moves in the  Y direction then axis A should be defined as a linear  i e  non rotational  axis and A should  be
283. wherever possible to avoid confusion  If Use Init on  ALL  Resets  is checked then these codes will be applied however Mach3 is reset     e g   after an EStop condition     Other check boxes     Persistent Jog Mode  if checked  will remember the Jog Mode you have chosen between  runs of Mach3Mill     Persistent Offsets  if checked  will save the work and tool offsets in the permanent tables  you have selected between runs of Mach3Mill  See also Optional Offset Save     Optional Offset Save  if checked  will prompt to check that you want to actually do any save  requested in Persistent Offsets     Copy G54 from G59 253 on startup  if checked  will re initiaise the G54 offset  i e  work  offset 1  values from the work offset 253 values when Mach3 is started  Check this if you  want to start up G54 to always be a fixed coordinate system  e g  the machine coordinate  system  even if a previous user might have altered it and saved a non standard set of values     A further discussion of these options is given in chapter 7     No FRO on Queue  if checked  will delay the application of feed rate override until the  queue of commands waiting to be implemented is empty  This is sometimes necessary to  avoid exceeding permitted sppeds or accelerations when increasing the FRO above 100      Home Sw Safety  if checked  will prevent motion of a axis during homing if the home  switch is already active  This is useful to prevent mechanical damage on a machine which  shares limit switches at
284. wn in Figure 10 6 is that you have a through hole and you want to  counterbore the bottom of hole  To do this you put an L shaped tool in the spindle with a  cutting surface on the UPPER side of its base  You stick it carefully through the hole when  it is not spinning and is oriented so it fits through the hole  then you move it so the stem of  the L is on the axis of the hole  start the spindle  and feed the tool upward to make the  counterbore  Then you stop the tool  get it out of the hole  and restart it     This cycle uses I and J numbers to indicate the position for inserting and removing the tool   I and J will always be increments from the X position and the Y position  regardless of the  distance mode setting  This cycle also uses a K number to specify the position along the Z   axis of the controlled point top of the counterbore  The K number is a Z value in the current  coordinate system in absolute distance mode  and an increment  from the Z position  in  incremental distance mode          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move at traverse rate parallel to the XY plane to the point indicated by I and J          Stop the spindle in a specific orientation          Move the Z axis only at traverse rate downward to the Z position          Move at traverse rate parallel to the XY plane to the X Y location          Start the spindle in the direction it was going before          Move the Z axis only at the given feed rate upward to the position indicated b
285. xample     10 5 4 Parameter Setting  A parameter setting is the following four items one after the other         a pound character          a real value which evaluates to an integer between 1 and 10320         an equal sign     and        a real value  For example   3   15  is a parameter setting meaning  set parameter  3 to 15    A parameter setting does not take effect until after all parameter values on the same line  have been found  For example  if parameter 3 has been previously set to 15 and the line   3 6 G1 x 3 is interpreted  a straight move to a point where x equals 15 will occur and  the value of parameter 3 will be 6     10 5 5 Comments and Messages  A line that starts with the percent character     is treated as a comment and not interpreted  in any way     Printable characters and white space inside parentheses is a comment  A left parenthesis  always starts a comment  The comment ends at the first right parenthesis found thereafter   Once a left parenthesis is placed on a line  a matching right parenthesis must appear before  the end of the line  Comments may not be nested  it is an error if a left parenthesis is found  after the start of a comment and before the end of the comment  Here is an example of a line  containing a comment  G80 M5  stop motion     An alternative form of comment is to use the two characters    The remainder of the line  is treated as a comment    Comments do not cause the machining system to do anything     A comment that is included
286. xisting coordinate of the Touched axis  is put into the Part Offset DRO and the axis DRO reads zero  Subsequent Touches on  other axes copy the Current Coordinate to the offset and zero that axis DRO     If you wonder what has happened then the following may help  The work offset values are  always added the numbers in the axis DROs  i e  the current coordinates of the controlled  point  to give the absolute machine coordinates of the controlled point  Mach3 will display  the absolute coordinates of the controlled point if you click the Machine Coords button  The  LED flashes to warn you that the coordinates shown are absolute ones     There is another way of setting the offsets which can be used if you know the position of  where you want the new origin to be     The corner of the paper is  by eye  about 2 6  right and 1 4  above the Home Reference  point at the corner of the table  Let s suppose that these figures are accurate enough to be  used     1  Type 2 6 and 1 4 into the X and Y Offset DROs  The Axis DROs will change  by  having the offsets subtracted from them   Remember you have not moved the actual  position of the Controlled point so its coordinates must change when you move the  origin     Table    Pen holder     Y   Z     Figure 7 3   Coordinate system origin offset to corner of paper    Coordinate systems  tool table and fixtures    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  7 4    2  If you want to you could check all is well by using the MDI line to G00 X0 Y0 Z0  The  pe
287. xpectedly     You may find  after a crash  that it fails to find the driver the first time it is run  In this case  merely run it again as the first run should fix things up     3 1 7  Notes for manual driver installation and un installation  You only need to read and do this section if you have not successfully run the  DriverTest program     The driver  Mach3 sys  can be installed and uninstalled manually using the Windows  control panel  The dialog boxes differ slightly between Windows 2000 and Windows XP  but the steps are identical         Open the Control panel and double click on the icon or line for System         Select Hardware and click Add Hardware wizard   As mentioned before Mach3 s  driver works at the lowest level in Windows   Windows will look for any new  actual hardware  and find none          Tell the wizard you have already installed it and then proceed to the next screen         You will be shown a list of hardware  Scroll to the bottom of this and select Add a  new hardware device and move to the next screen         On the next screen you do not want Windows to search for the driver so select  Install the hardware that I manually select from a list  Advanced         The list you are shown will include an entry for Mach1 2 pulsing engine  Select  this and go to the next screen         Click Have disc and on the next screen point the file selector to your Mach3  directory  C  Mach3 by default   Windows should find the file Mach3 inf  Select  this file and
288. y K          Move the Z axis only at the given feed rate back down to the Z position          Stop the spindle in the same orientation as before      Figure 10 6   G87 back boring sequence    G and M code Reference    Using Mach3Mill  Rev 1 84 A2  10 30         Move at traverse rate parallel to the XY plane to the point indicated by I and J          Move the Z axis only at traverse rate to the clear Z          Move at traverse rate parallel to the XY plane to the specified X Y location          Restart the spindle in the direction it was going before     When programming this cycle  the I and J numbers must be chosen so that when the tool is  stopped in an oriented position  it will fit through the hole  Because different cutters are  made differently  it may take some analysis and or experimentation to determine  appropriate values for I and J     10 7 24 9  G88 Cycle  The G88 cycle is intended for boring  This cycle uses a P word  where P specifies the  number of seconds to dwell  Program G88 X  Y  Z  A  B  C  R   L  P          Preliminary motion  as described above          Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position          Dwell for the P number of seconds          Stop the spindle turning          Stop the program so the operator can retract the spindle manually          Restart the spindle in the direction it was going     10 7 24 10  G89 Cycle  The G89 cycle is intended for boring  This cycle uses a P number  where P specifies the  number of secon
289. y a toothed belt drive  which would nearly double the available torque on the  screw     Slide with servo motor    Again we look at the size of one step  A servo motor has an encoder to tell its drive  electronics where it is  This consists of a slotted disc and will generate four    quadrature     pulses for each slot in the disc  Thus a disc with 300 slots generates 300 cycles per    Hardware issues and connecting your machine tool    Rev 1 84 A2  Using Mach3Mill  4 7    revolution  CPR  This is fairly low for commercial encoders  The encoder electronics will  output 1200 quadrature counts per revolution  QCPR  of the motor shaft     The drive electronics for the servo will usually turn the motor by one quadrature count per  input step pulse  Some high specification servo electronics can multiply and or divide the  step pulses by a constant  e g  one step pulse moves by 5 quadrature pulses or 36 17 pulses    This is often called electronic gearing     As the maximum speed of a servo motor is around 4000 rpm we will certainly need a speed  reduction on the mechanical drive  5 1 would seem sensible  This gives a movement of  0 0000167  per step which is much better than that required  0 0001      What maximum rapid speed will we get  With 35 000 step pulses per second we get 5 83  revolutions  35000  1200   5   of the leadscrew per second  This is OK at about 9 seconds  for 5  travel of the slide  Notice  however  that the speed is limited by the pulse rate from  Mach3 not th
290. y of working that feels comfortable     3 4  Manual Data Input  MDI  and teaching    3 4 1  MDI  Use the mouse or keyboard shortcut to display the MDI  Manual Data Input  screen     This has a single line for data entry  You can click in it to select it or use press Enter which  will automatically select it   You can type any valid line  that could appear in a part  program and it will be executed  when you press Enter  You can  discard the line by pressing  Esc  The Backspace key can be  used for correcting mistakes in  your typing     If you know some G code commands then you could try them out  If not then try     G00 X1 6 Y2 3    Which will move the tool to coordinates X   1 6 units and Y   2 3 units   it is G zero not G  letter O   You will see the axis DROs move to the new coordinates     Try several different commands  or G00 to different places   If you use the up or down  arrow keys while in the MDI line you will see that Mach3 scrolls you back and forwards  through the history of commands you have used  This makes it easy to repeat a command  without having to re type it  When you select the MDI line you will have noticed a flyout  box giving you a preview of this remembered text     An MDI line  or block as a line of G code is sometimes called  can have several commands  on it and they will be executed in the  sensible  order as defined in Chapter 10   not  necessarily from left to right  For example setting a feed speed by something like F2 5 will  take effect bef
291. you of the temporary  override  This will again allow you Reset and to jog off the switch and will then turn  itself and the flashing LED off  Again you should reference the machine  An input can  also be defined to override the limit switches   Note  however  although Mach3 uses limited jogging speed that you will not be prevented   in either case  from jogging further onto the switch and maybe crashing the axis in a  mechanical stop  Take great care     4 6 5  Referencing in action  When you request referencing  by button or G code  the axis  or axes  which have home  switches defined will travel  at a selectable low speed  in the defined direction until the  home switch operates  The axis will then move back in the other direction so as to be off the  switch  During referencing the limits do not apply     When you have referenced an axis then zero or some other value which is set up in the  Config gt State dialog  can be loaded into the axis DRO as its absolute machine coordinate  If  you use zero then the home switch position is also the machine zero position of the axis  If  the reference goes in the negative direction of an axis  usual for X and Y  the you might get  referencing to load something like  0 5  into the DRO  This means that the home is half an  inch clear of the limit  This wastes a bit of the axis travel but if you overshoot  when  jogging to Home  you will not accidentally trip the limits  See also Software Limits as  another way of solving this problem  
292. ypes of item  are divided into three groups by type     The first group  the words  may be reordered in any way without changing the meaning of  the line     If the second group  the parameter settings  is reordered  there will be no change in the  meaning of the line unless the same parameter is set more than once  In this case  only the  last setting of the parameter will take effect  For example  after the line  3 15  3 6 has  been interpreted  the value of parameter 3 will be 6  If the order is reversed to  3 6   3 15 and the line is interpreted  the value of parameter 3 will be 15     If the third group  the comments  contains more than one comment and is reordered  only  the last comment will be used     If each group is kept in order or reordered without changing the meaning of the line  then  the three groups may be interleaved in any way without changing the meaning of the line   For example  the line g40 g1  3 15  so there    4  7 0 has five items and  means exactly the same thing in any of the 120 possible orders   such as  4  7 0 g1   3 15 g40  so there    for the five items     10 5 8 Commands and Machine Modes  Mach3 has many commands which cause a machining system to change from one mode to  another  and the mode stays active until some other command changes it implicitly or  explicitly  Such commands are called  modal   For example  if coolant is turned on  it stays  on until it is explicitly turned off  The G codes for motion are also modal  If a G1  straight
293. yping it into the Step DRO or values can be set in this  DRO by cycling through a set of 10 user definable values using the Cycle Jog Step button     Incremental mode is selected by the toggle button or  if in Continuous Mode temporarily  selected by holding down Ctrl before performing the jog     6 2 5 2  Parallel port or Modbus MPG jogging  Up to three quadrature encoders connected to the parallel ports or ModBus can be  configured as MPGs for jogging by using the Jog Mode button to select MPG Jog Mode     The axis that the MPG will jogs is indicated by the LEDs and the installed axes are cycled  through by the Alt A button for MPG1  Alt B for MPG2 and Alt C for MPG3     Over the graphic of the MPG handle are a set of buttons for selecting the MPG mode     In MPG Velocity Mode the velocity of the axis movement is related to the rotational speed  of the MPG with Mach3 ensuring that the acceleration of the axis and top speed if  honoured  This gives a very natural feel to axis movement  MPG Step Velocity mode  currently works like velocity mode     In Single Step mode each  click  from the MPG encoder requests one incremental jog step   with the distance set as for hotkey Step jogging   Only one request at a time will be  allowed  In other words if the axis is already moving then a    click    will be ignored  In  Multi step mode  clicks will be counted and queued for action  Note that this means that for  large steps rapid movement of the wheel may mean that the axis moves a
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
data sheet - MEN Mikro Elektronik GmbH  Pince ampèremétrique 1000A AC/DC-600VAC/1000VDC  Home cinema MONOLITH CINE - Eon-Art  ISOTROPY Version 9.0 User`s Manual August 2007  取扱説明書 - Cateye  Manuel d`utilisation - File Delivery Service  Philips 200P6 Computer Monitor User Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file